Loading...
Menu

Revolt!

REVOLT!

By

G. Lewis Bauman

 

Copyright 2017 G. Lewis Bauman

 

Shakespir Edition

 

See also:

 

The Desideratum

By

G. Lewis Bauman

 

Copyright 2014 G. Lewis Bauman

Second Revision June, 2016

 

Shakespir Edition

 

 

This ebook may be reproduced, copied and distributed for non-commercial purposes, provided the book remains in its complete form. It may also be freely quoted from provided the proper credit is given. In each case, please acknowledge Smashword’s Self Publishing for making this book possible and giving it the wide-spread availability it enjoys.

If it should happen in a future time of reform and reconstruction, that those entrusted with revising the constitution would like to use all or part of the following, the author hereby and happily grants his permission.

 

This book is dedicated to a future United States marked by peace, prosperity, moral behavior by all, and freedom from government, military, banking, corporate, mass media, and voter corruption.

 

Table of Contents

 

Introduction

 

Start of Article XXVIII

 

Chapter one

Legal and Moral Justifications for Revolt

Section 1. The Declaration of Independence

Section 2. Modern Day “Facts”

Section 3. Mere Adjustments will not Suffice

 

Chapter Two

Six Foundation Stones for Article XXVIII

 

Section 1 The Providential Laws of Reality and Truth

Section 2. Moral Duty

Section 3. The Inferred, Naturally Occurring, Secular, Universal, and Unifying Morality

Section 4. Morality and Earthly Guardianship

Section 5. The First Person Singular, Moral Duty, and the Universal and Unifying Morality

Section 6. Government as a Component of the Division of Labor

 

Chapter Three

Fundamental Aspects of Government

 

Section 1. The Popular View of Government and Politics

Section 2. Government and Morality

Section 3. Government and Economics

Section 4. Government and Money

Section 5. Government and Taxation

Section 6. Government and Bureaucracy

Section 7. Government and Religion

Section 8. Government and Law Enforcement

Section 9. Government Secret Police and Intelligence Agencies

Section 10. Government and War

Section 11. When War Is Justified

Section 12. When War Is Not Justified

Section 13. The Gray Area

Section 14. The Popularity of War

 

Chapter Four

The Siren Calls

 

Section 1. The Conscious Management of Society from the Top (Socialism)

Section 2. Two Paths to Management from the Top

Section 3. The Question of Planning

Section 4. An Undesirable Consequence

Section 5. The Quest for a Third Alternative

Section 6. The Possibility for Limited and Sustainable Socialism

Section 7. The Word Should

Section 8. The Word Right

Section 9. Price Controls

Section 10. Government as the Insurer of Last Resort

Section 11. Living Beyond the Means

Section 12. The Forced Use of Artificial and Dishonest Fiat Currency

Section 13. Printing Fiat Currency Does Not Create New Wealth

Section 14. Fraud and Theft at the Currency Press

Section 15. Fiat Currency Inflation

Section 16. Fiat Currency Inflation and Fractional Reserve Banking

Section 17. The Monetary Inflation Time of Illusion, and the Economic Activity Cycle

Section 18. Fiat Currency Inflation, Surreptitious Debt Depreciation, and the Expropriation of Savings

Section 19. The Bequeathing of Debt to Future Generations

Section 20. Fiat Currency Inflation and the Manipulation of Interest Rates

Section 21. Fiat Currency Inflation and the Corruption of Economic Calculation

Section 22. Fiat Currency Inflation and the Consumption of Wealth

Section 23. Beneficiaries and Victims of Fiat Currency Inflation

Section 24. The Poisonous Allure of Fiat Currency Inflation

Section 25. Fiat Currency Inflation and War

 

Chapter Five

Revelations

 

Section 1. Introduction

Section 2. The Social, Economic, and Political (SEP) Spectrum

Section 3. Unrestrained Democracy and the SEP Spectrum

Section 4. Unrestrained Democracy and the Abandonment of Reality and Truth

Section 5. Unrestrained Democracy and the Rejection of the Universal and Unifying Morality

Section 6. Unrestrained Democracy and the Corruption of the Citizenry

Section 7. Unrestrained Democracy and the Corruption of the Politicians

Section 8. Unrestrained Democracy and the Triumph of Bureaucracy

Section 9. Unrestrained Democracy and the Destruction of the National Currency

Section 10. The Architrave of Freedom

Section 11. The Perversion of the Words Criminal and Radical

Section 12. The Nefarious and Propagandistic Use of the word Terrorism

 

Chapter Six

Revolution

 

Section 1. Revolting against a Democratic Government that has Lost its Way

Section 2. Saving the Currency

Section 3. Understanding the Dangers

Section 4. The New Pledge of Allegiance

 

Chapter Seven

The Decriminalization and Restructuring Commission (DRC)

 

Section 1. Introduction

Section 2. The Office of Policing and Investigations

Section 3. The Office of Federal Debt Repudiation and the Declaration of Bankruptcy of all Social Benefit Programs that have their Reserve Accounts Denominated in Worthless U.S. Government Instruments of Debt

Section 4. The Office of Receivership of the US Department of the Treasury

Section 5. The Office of the Decommissioning and Dismantling of the Federal Reserve System

Section 6. The Office of the Decommissioning and Dismantling of the Central Intelligence Agency

Section 7. The Office of the Decommissioning and Dismantling of the National Security Agency

Section 8. The Office of the Transformation of all Depository Institutions

Section 9. The Office of the Decommissioning and Dismantling of the Credit Card Industry (To Be Replaced by Debit Cards)

Section 10. The Office of the Decommissioning and Dismantling of the Student Loan Program

Section 11. The Office of the Restructuring of the Health Care Insurance Industry

Section 12. The Office of the Decriminalization of the U.S. Mass Media (Rescue from a Nefarious and Control Seeking Elite)

Section 13. The Office of Receivership of the Department of Defense

Section 14. Conclusion

 

Chapter Eight

The Restructured Judiciary

 

Section 1. The Supreme Court

 

Section 2. The Moral Council

Section 3. The Judicial Bureau of Policing and Investigations

Section 4. The Judicial Bureau of Truth and Reconciliation

Section 5. The Judicial Bureau of Sentencing Standards

Section 6. The Judicial Bureau of US Sovereignty

 

Section 7. The Judicial Bureau of Regulation

Section 8. The Office of Depository Institutions Regulation

Section 9. The Office of, Brokerage Institutions Regulation

Section 10. The Office of Public, Private, Charitable and Not-for-Profit Institutions Regulation

Section 11. The Office of Mass Media Regulation

Section 12. The Office of Voting and Elections Regulation

Section 13. The Office of Military Equipment Exports Regulation

Section 14. The Office of Internet Security and Protection

 

Section 15. The Judicial Bureau of Litigation

Section 16. The Office of Government, Intelligence, Military, and Federal Policing Integrity

Section 17. The Office of Depository Institutions (Banks) Integrity

Section 18. The Office of, Brokerage Institutions Integrity

Section 19. The Office of Public, Private, Charitable and Not-for-Profit Institutions Integrity (other than Sections 17 and 18)

Section 20. The Office of Mass Media Institutions Integrity

Section 21. The Office of Voting and Elections Integrity

 

Section 22. The Administrative Council

Section 23. The Office of the Comptroller of Paper and Metallic Money Standardization

Section 24. The Office of the Comptroller of Central Government Debt

Section 25. The Office of the Comptroller of Central Government Taxation

Section 26. The Office of Appointments

Section 27. The Office of Financial Records

 

Chapter Nine

The Restructured Legislative Branch

 

Section 1. Voting and Legislation Requirements

Section 2. Restrictions

Section 3. The Foreign Relations and Military Strategies Committee.

Section 4. The Domestic Relations and Strategies Committee

Section 5. Directors

Section 6. The Department of Financial Records (The National Treasury)

Section 7. The Department of Agriculture

Section 8. The Department of Air Quality Management

Section 9. The Department of Air Transportation

Section 10. The Department of the Armed Forces

Section 11. The Department of Commerce

Section 12. The Department of Critical Habitat and Wildlife Protection

Section 13. The Department of Energy

Section 14. The Department of the Federal Bureau of Investigation

Section 15. The Department of Federal Prisons

Section 16. The Department of Ground Transportation

Section 17. The Department of Health and Human Services

Section 18. The Department of Homeland Security

Section 19. The Department of Housing and Urban Development

Section 20. The Department of Intelligence

Section 21. The Department of Public Land Management (Interior)

Section 22. The Department of Justice

Section 23. The Department of Labor

Section 24. The Department of State

Section 25. The Department of Veterans Affairs

Section 26. The Department of Water Management

 

Chapter Ten

The Restructured Executive Branch

 

Section 1. The Structure

Section 2. The Commander-in-Chief

Section 3. The Chain of Command

Section 4. Foreign Affairs

Section 5. The Budget

Section 6. Restrictions

Section 7. Funding

 

Conclusion

 

End of Article XXVIII

 

Chapter Eleven

The Revolution Congress

 

Section 1. Introduction and Statement of Purpose

Section 2. The Call

Section 3. The Agenda

Item 1. Call to Order

Item 2. The New Pledge of Allegiance

Item 3. Nominations Committee Report

Item 4. Vote to Accept Report

Item 5. Vote to Organize the Congress

Item 6. Installation of Officers

Item 7. Funding of Revolution Congress and its Activities

Item 8. Legal and Justifiable Right of Revolt

Item 9. Purpose is Confined

Item 10. Declaration of Peaceful Rebellion

Item 11. Ratification of Article XXVIII

Item 12. Commission to Organize and Oversee a Branch Office of the Judiciary’s Bureau of Policing and Investigations during the Transition Period

Item 13. Commission for Legal Support

Item 14. Commission for Temporary Appointments

Item 15. Commission to Compose and Deliver Letters to Foreign Governments

Item 16. Commission to Organize, Staff, and Oversee the Decriminalization and Restructuring of the US Financial System and Government

Item 17. Commission to Organize, Staff, and Oversee the Office of the Joint Chiefs of Staff of Participating State Militias during the Transition Period

Item 18. Commission to Organize, Staff, and Oversee the Transformation and Operation of the Judicial Branch during the Transition Period

Item 19. Commission to Organize and Oversee the Transformation and Compliance of the Executive Branch during the Transition Period

Item 20. Commission to Organize and Oversee the Transformation and Compliance of the US Senate during the Transition Period

Item 21. Commission to Organize and Oversee the Transformation and Compliance of the US House of Representatives during the Transition Period

Item 22. Commission to Oversee the Compliance of the Secretary of Defense and the US Joint Chiefs of Staff during the Transition Period

Item 23. Vote on the Duration of the Transition Period and the Revolution Congress

Item 24. Hear closing reports from each of the above commissions. After each report, vote to accept closing report and dismiss reporting commission

Item 25. Endorse Article XXVIII by unanimous vote

Item 26. Motion to Terminate the Revolution and Dissolve the Revolution Congress and all of its Activities

 

References

 

List One (Free Downloads)

List Two (Must be Purchased)

List Three (Internet Viewing)

 

About the Author

 

 

****

 

 

Introduction

It is not within your author’s capabilities to provide a thorough account of the reforms that are needed. Rather, it is hoped the following pages will be accepted as an arrow that points the way toward a peaceful reorganization of the US financial system and government, within the confines of a single amendment (Article XXVIII) to the US Constitution.

Many people believe the US Constitution has become so widely dismissed by politicians and citizens alike, and has failed so miserably to protect our country from the financial and social calamity that is bearing down upon us, that trying to save it has little meaning.

None-the-less, there is much to be gained by retaining the Constitution. It has over two hundred and forty years of history behind it, and that continuity is too important to discard. Many fine and universally admired words and commentary would be lost and, given the acrimony of modern times the risk of writing a new constitution from scratch would be high.

Though the following offering may appear as arrogant, brazen, and too monstrous in size to be viable, your author believes it is something the founding fathers would approve of, given their original efforts have clearly failed to preserve the nation. Citizens must rouse themselves from their stupor and face a hard reality. Our beloved country is racing toward economic, social, and military collapse. They must seek answers to the following:

The nation’s political beliefs drift aimlessly this way and that, defined as they are by terms that are devoid of hard and fast meanings, such as conservative, liberal, left wing, and right wing etc. Is it possible for political understandings to be less ambiguous than the terms used to describe them? Is not something seriously amiss? Where is political bedrock? Our tallest buildings and most magnificent bridges rest on bedrock. Shouldn’t our political believes, some of the most important we have, be as firmly supported? How much do we really understand about politics?

The US government has run uninterrupted deficits for a mind-numbing procession of decades and has issued and continues to issue, mountains of debt certificates that everyone understands are hopelessly beyond repayment— yet not a word is spoken about bankruptcy. Where is reality? Indeed, where is sanity?

In this year of 2017, our government is operating in the red to the tune of some twenty trillion dollars. To grasp an understanding of the word trillion, consider the following question: How old would you, the reader of these lines, be if you were a trillion seconds old. The answer will surprise you. You would be 31,688.9 years old. If you were twenty trillion seconds old, you would be 633,761.8 years old. That would set your birth-year back to the days of Homo heidelbergensis, generally considered to be the precursor of Neanderthals, Denisovans, and our own species Homo sapiens, who first walked the earth some 200,000 years ago (from Wikipedia).

And yet, our federal deficits continue unabated as though nothing is amiss. In the current fiscal year it will amount to approximately a half a trillion dollars (see US Debt Clock.org). If you were a half a trillion seconds old, you would be 15,844.5 years old. Are we a nation of fools to think we can remain prosperous as we sink deeper and deeper into a sea of unpayable debt?

The cancers of unrestrained currency printing and debt accumulation are consuming the nation’s vital organs, yet only a handful of citizens seem to understand the twin policies are a means of extracting wealth from the future in order that it may be consumed today. Where is basic economic understanding? Why are our schools not teaching it? Why isn’t this topic ever discussed on the 5:30pm news? Why isn’t it screaming headlines in our newspapers? What will happen when the depleted tomorrows arrive on the scene? Should we be surprised when they do? Where is our love for our progeny?

Our policies of unlimited currency printing and debt accumulation, and our convoluted tax structure, all conspire to deny citizens a uniform and honest appraisal of the burden of government. Where is cost versus benefit understanding at the voting booth? In the absence of a working cost verses benefit feed-back loop, how can we think of ourselves as responsible voters? Is our democracy based on false precepts? Will it eventually fail us? Will our currency be printed into oblivion? Why are these topics so completely ignored by our favorite newscasters?

The Federal Reserve steals the interest on our savings from us and we do nothing! Why are we so docile in the face of this obviously criminal institution? Where is our rage? If a gun wielding thief-in-the-night did the same, would we not be enraged? Whatever happened to the biblical commandment Thou shalt not steal? Has theft become so institutionalized we no longer see it for what it is?

Political and military leaders believe they have a right, indeed a duty, to wage war under the guise of national defense and so-called American Exceptionalism (see References, List One, Numbers 6-8). Their foreign policies and wars are aimed at world domination, not friendly collaboration among nations. Our nation sows enemies by the millions with its primitive and hateful behavior. Yet, when they reply with vengeance, only a handful of citizens are able to see the vicious circle that stands before them. Where is our cognizance? Why are we so blind to this vicious circle we have helped to set in motion, and continue to support?

A huge body of convincing evidence demonstrates the 9/11/2001 buildings were brought down by controlled demolition, while the government maintains they were brought down by crashing airplanes and fires. Where are our investigative reporters? Where is integrity, commitment, and duty in the mass media industry (see the collapse of WTC Building 7 on YouTube)? Why does our government lie to us?

Citizens are conditioned and pacified by their favorite newscasters who read from scripts handed to them by media censors. The government and the Federal Reserve System issue a steady barrage of lies and propaganda which the mass media faithfully propagates. Economic and war news is minimal, especially if it casts the United States in a negative light. As a consequence, Americans are among the most poorly informed and manipulated people on the face of the earth. Where is salvation?

As difficult a task as it may be, US citizens must open their minds to their nation’s sordid behavior and leadership as well as their own sorry understanding and lack of responsibility at the voting booths. Truly informed people search the internet for unfiltered news, and read books written by studious investigators who fearlessly and diligently pursue the truth. They attend seminars and support those who are building truth coalitions. When choice warrants, they do not hesitate to vote for third party candidates.

Unrestrained currency printing and debt accumulation, criminal leadership, an irresponsible electorate, mindless wars, and aggressive policies foreign and domestic, cannot go on forever without ruinous consequences. Surely, in the not too distant future, the United States will find itself on its knees. War may explode in our home territory. A whole population of savers, investors, and retirees, will see their wealth disappear in the dust of collapsing fractional reserve banks and investment houses, and tens of millions in our beloved country will find themselves staring destitution and death in the face.

Our military activities around the world will be severely disrupted. Disengagement from our numerous wars is bound to be messy. Indeed, thousands upon thousands of military personnel, and vast stores of munitions and military hardware, including nuclear warheads, may be suddenly stranded abroad, with no working means of either protecting them, or bringing them home. Our soldiers abroad may pay a dear price for the cities they have destroyed, the innocents they have killed, and the enemies they have fostered.

The first priority of the revolution must be to bring home the full inventory of our nuclear warheads stationed abroad, including seaborne. Considering the precarious state of our economy, it is pure madness to think we can provide them future protection.

Great advances have been made in economic and political theory since the Constitution was set to paper. These advances are not reflected in its pages, and its brevity is such that it fails to provide citizens with the knowledge they need to defend it from crippling abuse by those in power.

The following offering will provide remedies and pave the way toward a more promising future for all. It will provide common citizens with a means of wringing the criminality out of their government and placing it back on the path of reality, honesty, integrity, and sanity. However, there is no doubt the transition will be enormously painful. The penalties for past stupidities cannot be glossed over. They must be suffered. Fear and desperation will grip the nation, and it must be anticipated the death toll will be high.

The question of the use of violence is difficult to answer. Although the globalist, mega-wealthy bankers and their minions in presidential palaces, parliament buildings, and gleaming offices of military hardware manufacturers are worthy of all the hatred that can be heaped upon them, there is little to be gained by going after them physically. Time and effort will be better spent finding our way out of the ruin they have bequeathed to us, while actively and totally rejecting any further domination by them. Our struggles will be waged on the economic and political fronts.

The ideas portrayed in this book are not your author’s ideas. They derive from nature and have been expressed in various ways in a large number of other books. References and credits, however, are omitted because they would disrupt the purpose and format of the book and prevent the reader from focusing on undiluted ideas. References infer additional research may be advantages, and it is time to turn away from endless research to focus on desperately needed action. Even so, I have included a brief number of references at the end of the book.

Readers will notice a considerable amount or repetition throughout the book, mostly as certain ideas are explored from different vantage points. Repetition, however, should not be disparaged. Repetition strengthens connections between brain neurons and promotes learning, and teaching readers to learn the material contained herein is the prime function of this book.

It is the dream of your author that the information presented will assist you, the reader, in fashioning your beliefs and behavior such that when you are old and look back on your life, you can rest content that you were a positive force in the world and have left a legacy worthy of your progeny’s admiration and gratitude.

With alterations and re-arraigning, much of the content of this book has been extracted from a previous and more extensive ebook entitled The Desideratum. Your author hopes it will attract more readers as a shorter, stand-alone book. For those seeking additional background information, The Desideratum is available free of charge, and the latest version can be downloaded from Shakespir.com.

Your author will accept no remuneration for the electronic version of this work.

 

G. Lewis Bauman

 

 

****

 

 

Start of Article XXVIII

 

Chapter One

Legal and Moral Justifications for Revolt

 

Section 1. The Declaration of Independence

For purposes of edification, the second paragraph of the Declaration of Independence is repeated here.

We hold these truths to be self-evident, that all men are created equal, that they are endowed by their Creator with certain unalienable Rights, that among these are Life, Liberty and the pursuit of Happiness.—That to secure these rights, Governments are instituted among Men, deriving their just powers from the consent of the governed,—That whenever any Form of Government becomes destructive of these ends, it is the Right of the People to alter or to abolish it, and to institute new Government, laying its foundation on such principles and organizing its powers in such form, as to them shall seem most likely to effect their Safety and Happiness. Prudence, indeed, will dictate that Governments long established should not be changed for light and transient causes; and accordingly all experience hath shewn, that mankind are more disposed to suffer, while evils are sufferable, than to right themselves by abolishing the forms to which they are accustomed. But when a long train of abuses and usurpations, pursuing invariably the same Object evinces a design to reduce them under absolute Despotism, it is their right, it is their duty, to throw off such Government, and to provide new Guards for their future security.—Such has been the patient sufferance of these Colonies; and such is now the necessity which constrains them to alter their former Systems of Government. The history of the present King of Great Britain is a history of repeated injuries and usurpations, all having in direct object the establishment of an absolute Tyranny over these States. To prove this, let Facts be submitted to a candid world.

The following sentence is particularly significant: “That whenever any Form of Government becomes destructive of these ends, it is the Right of the People to alter or to abolish it, and to institute new Government, laying its foundation on such principles and organizing its powers in such form, as to them shall seem most likely to effect their Safety and Happiness.”

The meaning of the above sentence could not be more direct. Given the rot and corruption that permeates the United States government in this year of 2017 it is the absolute right, indeed the duty, for the citizens of this country to rise up in rebellion against it.

The above paragraph is as binding today as the day it was voted into existence on July the 4th, 1776. Originally the government of Great Britain was the offending party. Today our own government is the culprit. The Declaration goes on to list a series of “Facts” against the government of Great Britain.

The following “Facts” are pertinent in today’s world.

 

Section 2. Modern Day “Facts”

Whereas the elected and appointed members of the United States government and the privately owned Federal Reserve System; (1) do not recognize that government is a component of the division of labor; (2) have usurped authority onto themselves not given to them by the citizens or by the constitution; (3) do not accept that they are bound by the same rules of moral behavior that govern the interactions of every citizen; (4) do not understand the difference between real and honest money, and artificial and dishonest currency; (5) have engaged in massive currency production and debt accumulation to carry on the government’s day-to-day operations and have, thereby, made themselves a party to deceit, theft, and swindle; (6) have allowed our government to become the agent for the depreciation of its own debt, with the result that all of the government’s debt certificates are rendered fraudulent; (7) have caused or allowed interest rates to be criminally manipulate in the downward direction, thereby stealing interest owned by the citizenry, falsifying all of business calculation, and robbing our economy of its efficiency; (8) have allowed nefarious, profit, and power hungry illuminati to plunge the nation into mindless and unnecessary wars; (9) whereas the basis for US foreign policy, fashioned by the same illuminati, has for several decades, been world domination rather than peaceful collaboration among nations; (10) whereas the elected and appointed members of the federal government and the privately owned Federal Reserve System have generally brought the nation to the brink of social and economic collapse; (11) whereas the elected and appointed members of the federal government have failed to adequately inform the citizenry that the so-called Federal Reserve System is not a part of the US government, rather it is a banking cabal owned by a group of mega-wealthy bankers who collect interest on all issued US currency and debt; (12) whereas the elected and appointed members of the federal government regularly engage in the corrupt and immoral practice of selling their influence for money and votes; (13) whereas the elected and appointed members of the federal government have, through legislation, made promises to the citizenry they cannot hope to deliver long term and have, thereby, deceived the citizenry; (14) whereas the elected and appointed members of the federal government have failed to inform the citizens that the nation is bankrupt and running on the fumes of money printing and debt accumulation; (15) whereas the elected and appointed members of the federal government have allowed the secret and unregulated Exchange Stabilization Fund to engage in wide-spread criminal and murderous activities; (16) whereas the elected and appointed members of the federal government have allowed the secret and unregulated Central Intelligence Agency to engage in wide-spread criminal and murderous activities; (17) and whereas the government has issued bald-faced lies regarding the killing of President John Kennedy in the year 1963, and the so-called Nine-Eleven attacks in the year 2001; representatives of the various states shall agree to meet in congress to consider whether a state of peaceful rebellion shall exist between the citizens of the various states represented at the congress, and the established government of the United States.

 

Section 3. Mere Adjustments will not Suffice

The Items listed in Section 2 are mortal wounds. The patient is dying. The national government is a criminal entity from top to bottom and has lost its legitimacy. It is no longer worthy of anyone’s respect or support. We are betrayed! Sweeping changes must be undertaken, and those changes will be accomplished only through revolt. The spine of government rot and corruption must be broken, as must the stranglehold the wealthy banking families have over the nation’s financial and political system.

Even so, the more smoothly this task can be accomplished the better. One of the tactics restructuring personnel should use, amid the dust and turmoil of tearing down and rebuilding, is to find ways of blending collapsed banks into the rebuilding process, and existing government institutions and departments, etc., together with their trained bureaucrats, into the reformed government. It will speed and smooth the transition to a new beginning and help to minimize the suffering of citizens.

It should be noted that the Declaration of Independence preceded the constitution and a revolt would, therefor, supersede Article V of the Constitution (Mode of Amendment) and any legal or forceful effort on the part of the established government to deny this peaceful rebellion its legitimacy, including a declaration of martial law. If the United States government should somehow find success in sidetracking or defeating this peaceful rebellion, all bets are off.

 

Back to Top

 

 

****

 

 

Chapter Two

Six Foundation Stones for Article XXVIII

 

Chapters One through Four of Part Two describe the theoretical underpinnings of Article XXVIII. The information they contain is generally not taught in the nation’s school systems and is not part of the knowledge base the vast majority of voters carry to the voting booths. Hopefully, presenting the information in this manner will provide voters with the ready resource they need to help them cast responsible and moral ballots in the future.

 

Section 1. The Providential Laws of Reality and Truth

God radiates reality and truth and is the sole source of reality and truth. Reality and truth radiate down upon humans through the otherwise opaque curtain of the understanding boundary and the incomprehensible and awesome occurrence of divine creation. Reality and truth are givens in the same sense that existence is a given. Since reality and truth flow directly from God, they are divinely sanctioned and are among the most powerful of godly messages.

The Providential Laws of Reality and Truth are as old as the time of creation, predate the emergence of life in the universe, and are omnipresent. Though mystery abounds, they underpin all of divine creation. The universe exists because it is real and true. The galaxies and stars are synonymous with reality and truth. The mother planet is held in orbit about the sun by reality and truth. The oceans, mountains, forests, and plains exist because they are real and true. Earthly life exists because of reality and truth, as does everything that living beings see, touch, hear, and smell.

Indeed, can it be otherwise? Was divine creation permeated with the unreal and untrue? Do time and space exist because they are unreal and untrue? Would matter, energy, gravity, and magnetism exist in the absence of reality and truth? Is life based on the absence of reality and truth? The answers are inexorable.

The natural world, reality, and truth, are as one. They are an inseparable blend. They are factual and irrefutable. Even the mysteries of nature are real and true; otherwise they would not be obstacles to understanding. Since reality and truth constitute laws that issue directly from God, they are entities that demand obedience. They are part of the sacred world and are not to be denied or abused by humans. As radiant messages, they are omnipresent and available to all who would but be aware of them.

People who are enamored with unreal and untrue moral, economic, and political beliefs, are in violation of godly intent, and will eventually suffer severe penalties for their moral, economic, and political defilements.

To be sure, what is real and true can sometimes be difficult to discern. Reality and truth are sometimes partially or wholly hidden from view. Mistakes will be made. There is, however, no excuse for disregarding reality and truth in the most elemental of circumstances. All matters that are important to the social well-being, particularly those regarding, morality, economics, politics, and government, must be consistent with the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth. It is as a call from God.

 

Section 2. Moral Duty

Moral Duty, defined as the urge to do good and be good, is a human manifestation of the desire to survive and the radiant laws of reality and truth, which appear to the human soul as powerful dual spirits. The essence of Moral Duty is comprised of a series of truisms that arise from the spirits of reality, truth, and the desire to survive. Among them are: peace is better than war, friendship is better than animosity, love is better than hate, safety is better than danger, cooperation is better than combat, prosperity is better than destitution, security is better than insecurity, kindness is better than cruelty, trust is better than suspicion, and a long life is better than a short one.

These and similar truisms are concomitants of human life; for surely a secure and content life is not possible in a human community where assault, murder, theft, contempt, hatred, vengeance, irresponsibility, and all things hateful and dreadful, are social norms practiced by all. The people of such a community would murder each other off until only one individual was left, and that individual would perish of a broken heart.

There exists in every human soul, therefore, an innate desire to defend the truisms and make them the basis for behavioral standards. Bound together, they provide the powerful impetus of Moral Duty. Like eating, drinking, and breathing, Moral Duty is an essential feature of human life and a prime requirement for successful social interaction and living. It is an inherent spirit, however weak or strong, in every human soul.

Moral Duty evokes powerful emotional sets that tug at the soul in the same way gravity tugs at the human body and holds it to earth. Humans are constantly striving for improved security and happiness for themselves and for their loved ones. When an element of morality is identified in the individual mind, it is Moral Duty that pulls the individual to act in accord with that discovery.

If it can be said that God communicates with humankind, surely one of the paths is through the spirit of Moral Duty. The vast majority of people feel the pull of Moral Duty and understand, intuitively, where the pull comes from. Is it not true that people attribute righteousness to God? Has not righteousness always been a hallmark of God? When people act in accord with Moral Duty, they feel happiness within. They feel the love and proximity of God. Righteousness and happiness are kindred spirits. Happiness is but one of a number of important spirits that add intensity to the pull of Moral Duty.

Moral Duty is a positive force. It is a force that builds rather than destroys. It is a force that fosters love and respect rather than contempt and hatred. It is a force that fosters responsibility rather than irresponsibility. It teaches the pursuit of the noble virtues and the rejection of all ignoble acts and thoughts. Since human life, the will to survive, and the radiant laws of reality and truth are divinely inspired, so is Moral Duty divinely inspired and must be the guiding light of every individual seeking happiness and fulfillment within the kingdom of divine creation.

There is no such thing as a duty to commit evil. Evil stands by itself and is without justification or merit. Only moral or positive duty is divinely sanctioned and meaningful. Action in the direction of evil is an abandonment of duty, and is devoid of both meaning and divine sanction.

Day-to-day social experiences are very influential. Repeated experiences, good or bad, will leave lasting impressions within the soul that will either work for, or against, the spirit of Moral Duty. Souls are constantly exposed to spirits competing with the influence of Moral Duty. Souls are healthy or ill depending on the nature of the spirits they harbor, absorb, or reject. Youthful training is crucially important. If the souls of the young are engrained with false spiritual and moral ideas, Moral Duty can be perverted and sidetracked.

The judgments of history and reason are emphatic. Happiness, fulfillment, and long life can best be achieved through peace, respect, understanding, forgiveness, acceptance, charity, love, and compromise. The divine law of righteous Moral Duty is as sure as if it were written on stone or communicated to all of the human community directly by God. It is Moral Duty that propels human relations in the direction of peace, happiness, and righteousness.

Moral Duty, however, only provides the motive power and direction for righteous behavior. Discovering, codifying, and putting into practice specific rules of behavior is a secular undertaking and is the duty of the interacting human community.

 

Section 3. The Inferred, Naturally Occurring, Secular, Universal, and Unifying Morality

The Inferred, Naturally Occurring, Secular, Universal, and Unifying Morality, is the only true system of moral beliefs. The true morality arises spontaneously out of human interaction and is a naturally occurring phenomenon. It is a universal and unifying morality in that it applies equally to all members of the human community. It is the art of discovering, codifying, and practicing those rules of behavior that will allow each human the best chance of living in peaceful collaboration with all other members of the human community, and in balance with all other elements of divine creation. Its origin is simple and direct. There is nothing mysterious or supernatural about it, nor is there anything mysterious or supernatural about its usefulness or need.

The true morality arises as each human soul recognizes that if it desires to achieve a happy and secure life, certain considerations must be granted to other souls seeking the same thing. It is, therefore, a given that relationships with other humans must be characterized by courtesy, friendship, respect, understanding, and compassion. All people must be constantly aware of and practice the art of getting along with all other members of the human community. Since moral behavior is divinely inspired, it should be practiced by all.

Though the Universal and Unifying Morality is generally rejected as a distinct moral system, it is often referred to. When people of different races, nations, or faiths speak of the need to get along with each other, they unwittingly refer to the Universal and Unifying Morality and admit its validity, while clinging tenaciously to their divisive racial, religious, and national identities. The same can be said of people praising moral unity, while remaining faithful to their numerous and conflicting religion-based moral systems.

Most people live, therefore, with a moral contradiction. Subconsciously, they recognize the existence of the Universal and Unifying Morality and its transcendence over all other factors of identity. But, since it is at odds with everything they have been taught since childhood, and would assail their most cherished passions of affiliation, they cannot openly live by it without bringing severe trauma into their lives. The fear of change pushes the Universal and Unifying Morality behind the opaque shadows of false creeds and old superstitions. Yet, the true and unifying morality shines with the radiance of divine creation for all who would see and feel it. People will eventually recognize the advantages of yielding to it, as its rejection brings more and more horror onto the human landscape.

It must be emphasized there is only a single moral system that derives from nature, which is to say, God. Just as there is but one divine creator, so is there but one true moral system. Claims that there are separate and distinct moral systems springing from different faiths, or for use in specific situations, are false. Since there is only one true moral order, it must apply in all situations. The same moral tenets that guide the behavior of individuals, must also guide the behavior of all ethnic groups, businesses, law enforcement agencies, armies, and governments.

The Universal and Unifying Morality is the only moral system that all thoughtful and righteous people, living in every corner of the human community, can recognize, believe in, and accept as their own, if only they would choose to do so. It binds everyone together as brothers and sisters in the art and adventure of living.

To be sure, there will be situations where the rules of the true morality will not suffice. Morality is present and future oriented. It can do little about the horrors of the past, except to insist the human community learn from those horrors and vow never to repeat them.

At other times, the lesser of two evils must be chosen. It would be unreasonable to try to delve into every possible situation that might arise. The best that can be hoped for is that the people on the scene will keep their wits about them and arrive at solutions that will best serve the interests of the Universal and Unifying Morality in the long run.

As a naturally occurring social phenomenon, the real and true morality is a proper subject for scientific investigation. However, for common people, it reduces to simply behaving in a thoughtful and righteous manner.

Humans can look forward to brighter tomorrows, but only as they put their minds to the best use and learn to accept the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth and the Universal and Unifying Morality as life-long guiding lights.

 

Section 4. Morality and Earthly Guardianship

Earthly Guardianship is a vital component of the Universal and Unifying Morality. Morality extends beyond contemporary human interactions. It also reaches out to generations yet unborn. In addition to other things they may bequeath, people of today interact with people of the future in terms of earthly resources and features, which may be altered, despoiled, or used up.

In terms of possessing the wherewithal of despoiling the landscape, atmosphere, and oceans, as well as destroying other life forms, the human community must view itself as the dominant life form of the mother planet. Humans, therefore, have a moral obligation to protect and preserve everything in their charge. They may take steps to preserve their species and to achieve and maintain good health. But they cannot engage in the wholesale destruction of other things sacred without violating God’s grand design, and desecrating the blessings of their own existence. Other life forms of the mother planet, as well as the mountains, valleys, plains, forests, rivers, and oceans, are creations of no less importance than the human species. Along with humankind, they have been given the divine blessing of existence.

The real and true morality, therefore, demands that humans love and protect their mother planet and its rich diversity of plants and animals. It demands that large tracts of land and water, including migration routes, grazing, spawning and nesting grounds, etc., be set aside for other-than-human habitat; that strong restrictions govern the discharge of industrial waste or other harmful products onto and into the earth’s land, waters, and atmosphere; and that humans limit their own numbers so other life forms may thrive with a vigor equal to that of humans. Priority must be given to the future, for if it is given to the present, humans will bequeath an increasingly bleak future to their offspring, and that is something they have no moral right to do.

In contemporary times, the earth is suffering greatly. Its land and waters, and the thin envelope of air that feeds the lungs of the earth’s mammals, have already been sharply degraded. In some areas where the human population is especially dense, natural resources are largely depleted, and millions of people are facing death for want of shelter, food, and drink. It is a picture that will eventually overtake every society on earth if something is not done.

The earth is warming as a result of human activity. Polar and glacial ice is melting, and rising seas will inundate many lands now crowded with people. Humankind will pay a high price for the damage it has already imposed on the mother planet. If the damage continues, it may be that the earth will only support a much smaller human population in the future.

Those who say that all of the earth’s resources should be available for exploitation are only postponing the issue of overpopulation. Surely a day of reckoning will come, as resources become increasingly scarce, when a large scale human die-off will occur. Moreover, as resources become increasingly scarce, nations will war with each other over the remaining resources. The human community has two choices. It can address the issue of overpopulation reasonably and morally, and with due regard for its Earthly Guardianship responsibilities, or it can simply wait for the inevitable day of reckoning. Either way, the issue will be resolved.

 

Section 5. The First Person Singular, Moral Duty, and the Universal and Unifying Morality

The First Person Singular is the supreme defender of Moral Duty and the Universal and Unifying Morality.

This edict issues from God and is undeniable. Only individuals can think, and there is no such thing as collective or institutional thought, though it is often spoken of. Only individuals can act, and there is no such thing as a collective or institutional action that is outside the sum of individual actions, though it is often spoken of. Only individuals feel the pull of Moral Duty, and there is no such thing as a pull of Moral Duty in a collective or institutional sense, though it is often spoken of.

What is referred to as collective thought, action, and duty, etc., is simply an occasion when individual thoughts, actions, or duties, etc., are more powerfully felt within a gathering of people with similar views. The excitement and synergy of the crowd invites individuals to surrender their will, either to the crowd itself or to the leadership structure giving voice to the commonly held beliefs.

But individuals can never logically surrender their moral obligations to a collective level. Crowds or social institutions are not living things. They exist only as aggregates of individuals bound together by common threads. They exist as emotional sets and ingrained features in the individual souls of which they are composed. Crowds or social institutions are a state of mind and are spiritual in nature. They do not feel or think, they do not plan, they do not foresee, and they do not act. Peace and world order will not derive from any crowd or social institution, even a religious one.

The individual, not crowds or social institutions, must be the focal point for the improvement of the human condition. Only individuals are capable of mustering the qualities needed for righteous and dutiful moral behavior. Only individuals can displace chaos with order, war with peace, hatred with respect, criminal behavior with moral behavior, and disinterest with concern and love. Peace, social, and world order must grow from the bottom up, just as a tree must grow from its roots. Peace, social harmony, and prosperity will arrive on the scene as large numbers of righteous people give rise to righteous social institutions.

However, most people are born under the umbrella of an existing social order and grow up conditioned by it. Often it is a regional or racially specific social order that excludes large numbers of people, and is filled with archaic behavioral directives that fail to contribute to world stability. In the case of laws, there are good laws, and there are bad laws. Some laws will be consistent with divinely inspired moral precepts, while other laws will not.

Depending on their quality, leaders can take a social order upward toward morality, prosperity and fulfillment or downward to economic and social madness. Leaders, however, think, plan, and act only as individuals. Their claims that they represent society may be viewed with approval or disdain. In any case, individuals must always accept responsibility for the kind of leaders they choose to follow or, more importantly, fail to oppose.

When people surrender a portion of their moral duties and pass them up to a collective level, they are entrusting to luminaries the right to define their moral duties for them. As long as that trust is not violated all is well and good, but when that trust is violated, individuals must stand ready to reclaim their divinely inspired assignment.

The meaning of this section goes beyond its quiet title. When society is plunging into ruin and chaos because of unworkable institutions, policies, and false theories, people possessed of knowledge that is in keeping with Moral Duty and the Universal and Unifying Morality, must step to the fore and lead. It is time to cast hesitation aside and yield to the energy of volition and the call of righteousness. Quality leaders are needed at the pulpit, before mass media microphones and cameras, at news desks of great newspapers, in school classrooms at all levels, and in the political arena. They are needed to write books, give speeches, and become influential leaders. They are needed to assemble and lead massive demonstrations down grand promenades, into public squares, and to the very steps of government buildings and central bank fortresses. Demonstrators must have the same honest and sincere purpose as the demonstration figureheads. The battle of words, ideas, and demonstrations must be entered into with great vigor and with an absolute resolve to defeat those who would tear down society and deliver the human community into a hellish existence of dictatorship and war.

Children cannot be expected to alter an immoral social order. Adults must take the lead. As adults become educated and worldly, and come to realize the limitations and destructive qualities of their inherited social order, it becomes incumbent upon them to do everything in their power to bring about change for the better. Everywhere, social entities must learn to embrace Moral Duty and the Universal and Unifying Morality, for they are truly sanctioned by divine authority and are the birthright of every human being.

There is no escape for the First Person Singular. He or she is the supreme champion of Moral Duty and the Universal and Unifying Morality. The Divine Essence calls upon the First Person Singular to be a spiritual, moral, economic, and political activist. It is a dictum of nature, which is to say God, and it is a dictum from which there is no appeal.

 

Section 6. Government as a Component of the Division of Labor

Government is not an ordained entity to be used by a privileged few to lord over the many, nor is it the property of any exalted individual or group of individuals. It does not exist of its own accord, nor does its authority exist of its own accord. Government derives its reason for being from the people it governs and does not stand apart from them. It arises as a component of the division of labor and must always be thought of in that sense.

The division of labor within a community leads naturally to the concept of government. In the same way morality springs from the ruin that ensues when people fail to practice it, the concept of government springs from the confusion and lack of focus of a disordered human community.

People gather to form communities because they find safety in numbers, and because they quickly discover the division of labor makes life easier and better for all concerned. Living in community, different groups can specialize in making shoes, clothes, shelters; tending domesticated animals; raising crops; enforcing agreements; policing unruly members, and guarding against encroachments by those who would do harm. Everyone benefits from this naturally occurring phenomenon as the social structure becomes more efficient in satisfying the communal needs.

It is soon realized that it is useful to have an authority higher than that of the general population for governing the community and maintaining the peace. A leadership entity must be established to clarify the social framework and set it on bedrock. The standards of moral behavior that allow people to live and thrive together in peace and security must be integrated into the social framework so the standards may take on the force of law.

Therefore do people willingly surrender a measure of the authority they have over their own lives for the convenience and benefits of government. Government exists only because the people will it to exist. Its role is that of the servant, not the master. Its purpose is to serve, to serve equally, and to dominate only to the degree necessary to fulfill the functions surrendered to it by the people, including the responsibilities owed to future generations.

Community members do not agree to the establishment of a leadership entity that may enslave them. They want the leadership entity to be the very embodiment of righteousness. That is the only reason moral and thoughtful citizens will agree to its establishment. Government must be constrained by the same moral system that guides the interaction of individual citizens. It follows that a moral and just government is divinely sanctioned in the same way the Universal and Unifying Morality is divinely sanctioned.

With a hard and fast social framework in place, and a system of moral behavior set firmly within that framework, well-meaning and moral people are able to interact with each other in safety and with the expectation that exchanges agreed to will be honestly and forthrightly consummated. People are able to become future oriented, and work together to build their community, husband scarce resources, and preserve the beauty of the earth.

Governments maintain their divinely sanctioned status only as their structure and philosophy remains soundly rooted in the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth, Moral Duty, the Universal and Unifying Morality, and the concept of government as a component of the division of labor. Woe onto the citizens, when those roots are broken and government becomes a force onto its own. It easily happens in mass societies where government can become very bureaucratic and distant, and especially where the roots of government are not widely understood or accepted in the first place.

Logically, all governments should be democracies. Of course, any democracy rooted in the division of labor presupposes voters are knowledgeable and moral people, who will cast their ballots on the basis of true economic and moral principles, rather than some selfish desire or need. When that is not the case, and when there are no checks in place to prevent the misuse of the ballot, democracy easily slides onto the path leading to omnipotent and criminal government. Citizens beware!

 

Back to Top

 

 

****

 

 

Chapter Three

Fundamental Aspects of Government

 

Section 1. The Popular View of Government and Politics

The central government or lack thereof that people live under will profoundly influence their lives. Government is, perhaps, the most important single determinant of happiness. Living under the influence of anarchy or oppression, where suffering and death are constant companions, will elicit one level of contentment, if such it can be called, while living under conditions of peace, social harmony, and prosperity, will elicit another. The question arises: against what standards are governments to be judged? In the contemporary world, false and antiquated ideas permeate all of social thought, making the issue particularly perplexing.

Are central governments to be judged by their long tradition, by their stability, by the happiness and prosperity of those who are governed, or by the power and the might of their armies? Are they to be judged by how well they are loved, or how fairly they govern? If a government is said to govern fairly, what does that mean? The word fair has an ambiguous meaning. What is fair to one person may be heartless or stupid to another. Governments may at one moment bring happiness and prosperity to a people, only to cast them into ruin and despair the next. Tyranny can enjoy a long tradition, and dearly loved kings can lead their nation into ruinous wars.

A religious government may be accepted as godly and therefore moral and just; but if citizens live in bondage and depravity, is not something amiss? How can the idea that a privileged few should lord over the many be justified? By what manner of reason should a leader be thought of as a God substitute? Does the concept of the divine right of kings have any validity? Is there such a thing as an inherent right to govern? Does the power to kill enshrine a leader?

There is a natural tendency to simply judge other governments by one’s own. But accepted biases and the lack of a standardized and meaningful reference frame places the inquiring mind on a path leading to nowhere. Nor is it sufficient or safe for individuals to judge their government on the basis of day-by-day information provided by the mass media. Too often that information is derived from government sources, laced with fallacies, and does little to inform.

Misleading political words and phrases add to the dilemma. The great masses, including a large majority of the most well-known politicians and political scholars, are caught up with such terms as liberal, conservative, progressive, left wing, right wing, and the like. There is a general belief these nomenclatures have tangible meanings, and that they can be used to define the full gamut of political viewpoints. By feeling an affinity for one term over another, and the popular notions regarding them, people find an emotional point somewhere on an imagined spectrum and feel they know where they stand on any political issue.

However, the definitions of these words and phrases are ambiguous. They are not anchored to a solid reference frame that provides useful and comparative meanings. A useful spectrum cannot be created with ambiguous end points. The result is a grand political befuddlement, though most people are not aware they are befuddled. They are not aware how the system favors emotions and denigrates factual analysis.

Within the definitions of the words conservative and liberal, where is bedrock? Where are the absolute standards that can be used to judge political events and ideas? Some so-called conservatives say they want to maintain the status quo, but exactly what is the status quo they want to maintain? How can it be described in an absolute way? Other conservatives want their country to revert to some previous era; but what, exactly, does that mean? Where is the reference frame that can be used to define that previous era so a common understanding may be achieved by all?

In defining the words conservative and liberal, the dictionaries refer to the word change. It is said that conservatives resist change, while liberals are in favor of change; but change from what, and to what? What anchors the word change? The dictionaries do not say. The meanings of the words conservative and liberal are so ambiguous and relative, that in different contexts, their usages often overlap. Indeed, one word can sometimes be substituted for the other, with no one the wiser. Of what use are words that can mean so many different things? They are like flotsam in the middle of a sea of uncertainty. Tying one’s political beliefs to flotsam accomplishes nothing.

The left wing/right wing trumpery, so often referred to by writers and politicians, further compounds the problem. This geometric image has, by some bizarre accident or default, been metamorphosed into a kind of “anything is better than nothing” political reference frame. It serves people poorly. They become confused and desperate as they wander down paths that lead to situations they neither expect nor want. It is no small matter. When a governing structure breaks down under the impetus of false political ideas, the resulting chaos can bring misery and death to tens of millions.

In the contemporary world, the general view of government, of what it should be and what it is in particular cases, is confused and clouded. It follows that words and phrases such as liberal, conservative, progressive, left wing, right wing, and the like, do not suffice as political references. Their definitions are too ambiguous to be of any value. Their use must be abandoned!

The phrase representative government is another example of how words can easily mislead thought. On the surface, representative government is a likable phrase. It has positive emotional connotations. The phrase connotes freedom and participation in government. Everyone understands what the word representative means, and everyone understands what the word government means. It would seem safe to assume when the two words are combined, the two meanings would also combine into an obvious and useful total meaning. However, such is not the case. The problem lies with the word representative.

Most people living in the contemporary world are interested in obtaining a wide range of goods and services from their government. Some people want government-sponsored education, government-sponsored healthcare services, housing for the elderly and poor, and housing and support for unmarried mothers and their children. They want government-sponsored mass transit systems and government-sponsored roadways. Others want laws regarding abortion, homosexuality, immigration, and a host of other things. The list goes on and on.

The public official who wants to truly represent his or her constituents clearly faces a formidable task. Constituents may number in the thousands or millions, and information is needed from each individual. Moreover, individuals do not want the same things or want them to the same degree. Citizen “A” may want a national health insurance program, a public education program, and a law regarding abortion, in that order, while citizen “B” may want a mass transit system, a national retirement program, and a law regarding immigration, in the same order. Citizen “A” cannot quantify the intensity of desire felt for a national health insurance program, nor can she/he quantify the difference in intensity felt for any of the three choices made. The same is true for citizen “B.” Nor can persons “A” and “B” compare the relative intensities of their differing desires. In addition, Person “A” might harbor negative feelings regarding a desire of person “B,” or vice versa, making the situation even more complex.

Unfortunately, there is no reference frame that accurately measures and conveys information about political desires. The emotions people assign to their political desires is ordinal information, as opposed to cardinal information. Ordinal information can be ranked in individual minds but not quantified. Information that cannot be quantified is not additive or comparable. If this difficulty exists with just two constituents, what understanding can be achieved in the case of thousands or millions of constituents?

The phrase representative government is an unfortunate and inappropriate combination of words. It is a major contributor to the grand political befuddlement, for it is simply not possible for politicians to accurately gather and process political information from constituents that may number in the millions. The reference frame needed for that purpose does not exist. Obviously, the idea of representative government in a mass society is a fiction. The phrase is a good example of the power of indoctrination. Everyone accepts the phrase as true, though it only takes a small measure of time and thought to prove it false.

What really happens is outside of the popular concept of representative government. So-called representatives observe the work and influence of special interest groups, listen to lobbyists, advocates, and constituents, and try to sense the general trend of public opinion on particular issues. They then do their work in accord with their best judgment, and in a way that will enable them to maintain their popularity and their jobs.

In addition, each administration leaves behind a structure of laws, policies, and programs. New politicians arrive on the scene, each with new ideas about how the nation might be set straight. Unwilling to incur the wrath of entrenched bureaucrats and legions of beneficiaries, they rarely try to tear down what they find in place. The most attractive alternative for them is to add to the existing structure. So it is that government becomes ever more complex and weighty.

The above leads to the following conclusion, which may be thought of as the First Law of Government and Politics:

 

Governmental and political understandings cannot be less ambiguous than are the terms and other concepts commonly used to describe those understandings.

 

Section 2. Government and Morality

There is only one true moral order. It governs human relationships at all levels and humankind’s relationship with the future and with the earth. Though government is not a living organism, it is made up of living organisms (people) who are bound by the same moral considerations as those who are governed. The fact that one person is a member of the governing bureaucracy and another is not is of no consequence. As an institution, government should behave in a manner that is consistent with what is expected from those who are governed. In all government citizen relations, moral behavior, based on the Universal and Unifying Morality, must reign supreme. Just as individuals must subordinate their passions of affiliation to the art and practice of friendship, goodwill, respect, and peace, so must the actions of government, at all levels, be reflective of those same moral considerations. People do not create governments as a component of the division of labor, so it may oppress them.

There is no second moral order that applies to government but not to the citizenry. There is no second moral order that allows people in government to engage in activities private citizens cannot engage in without being labeled as criminals. It is, therefore, up to the First Person Singular to maintain his or her moral compass in the face of a run-away government. Citizens must demand that government officials, even of the highest order, be forced to observe the same moral codes that ordinary citizens are expected to observe. No laws should be passed that would violate the moral codes that must be observed by ordinary citizens.

When a politician sells his or her influence to special interest groups, it is not a matter of “business as usual” or “the way of politicians.” It is outright corruption and a gross abandonment of moral responsibility. When politicians agree to defer costs of popular social programs into the future in order to win the favor of current constituents, they are guilty of stealing from the citizens of tomorrow, and should be viewed and treated as common criminals, as should their supporters. When politicians agree to the production of paper fiduciary media in order to paper over budgetary problems or fuel artificially low interest rates, they are guilty of deceit, fraud, and theft, and deserve to be scorned by the populace and prosecuted as criminals. Power always tends to corrupt. Those who yield to corruption should be brought down as soon as possible; for corruption, like a cancer, spreads from a small beginning.

A moral government is a secular government free of all passions of affiliation, save for the passions that derive from the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth, the Universal and Unifying Morality, and the concept of government as component of the division of labor. A moral government is constrained by its constitution and honest money. It supports a free, disciplined, self-sustaining and earth-friendly social structure with a minimum of constraints. A moral government does not play favorites. It is a champion of all people equally, and actively fights social oppression and intolerance of all kinds and at all levels.

 

Section 3. Government and Economics

The science of economics seeks to unravel the mysteries of spontaneously occurring value phenomena in complex societies engaged in free trade. Based on a handful of axioms, and with rigorous attention paid to the rules of logic, since it is difficult to experiment with social phenomena, the science of economics has been slowly assembled in a step-by-step fashion. A well-grounded structure now exists that explains in good detail, all of the economic questions that once mystified investigators. It is available to all who would study it. Honest and knowledgeable citizens and political luminaries should make the best use of it. It is an excellent guide that can be used to help keep citizens and governments alike on the path of honesty, and operating within the bounds of reality, truth, and righteousness. It is called the Austrian School of Economics, and is championed in the United States by the Foundation for Economic Education, (fee.org), and the Mises Institute, (mises.org), as well as a number of other institutions.

However, large numbers of people are intolerant of the restraints rigorous economics imposes on both citizens and governments. They see too many needs unanswered and believe more can and should be done. They believe government should use its authority to pass laws that will correct what they see as the shortcomings imposed by the heartless science of economics. They believe government can engineer and build prosperity that would not otherwise exist. The state worshipers needed a version of economics that would sanctify the things they wanted to do. Of course it was only a matter of time before it was forthcoming. Always there are people willing to answer a popular calling, and it is no less true for those who call themselves economists.

During a time of desperation many decades ago, a version of economics was conceived that gave the government activists much of what they wanted. It is a version of economics that has been shorn of its scientific roots. It is filled with the jargon of economics, contains much that is true, and has a strong ring of plausibility for those unaware of the scientifically grounded school of economic thought. It exists in beautifully bound books written by prestigious authors and is taught at leading universities around the world. Unfortunately, for man and history, it is a version of economics that is grossly misleading, generally false, and will lead any nation practicing it to eventual ruin.

Nonetheless, in contemporary times, the perverted and politicized brand of economics is the economics of choice throughout most of the world that calls itself civilized. As a result, the leading nations of the world are drowning in a sea of paper currency and debt. Monetary and credit collapse is not far away. No one today can imagine a world of honest money, governments free of corruption and debt, and wars so immediately costly to all that both leaders and the general populace would never permit them to occur save if they were defensive in nature.

The First Person Singular, who loves the Universal and Unifying Morality, peace, social stability, and freedom, must plunge into an impassioned quest for economic knowledge. It is not enough to accept what is taught in high school or university classrooms. Economic literature, whether old, new, good, or bad, must be personally explored. The various schools of economic thought must be discovered and the information gleaned held up to the light of the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth and the Universal and Unifying Morality.

All of this study must be done firsthand. To trust others in this crucial matter is tantamount to surrendering ones soul to the care of dubious and conniving characters, and to do such a thing is ungodly. God did not bestow a brilliant mind onto humans so they may surrender the responsibility of thought to someone else. After acquiring the necessary economic knowledge, it is the duty of the First Person Singular to put it to use. The construction of economic policies and institutions that are consistent with reality, truth, and the Universal and Unifying Morality, would go a long way in reducing the conflict and suffering that plagues the present day human landscape.

 

Section 4. Government and Money

Perfect money would provide an unchanging financial reference point. Good for all times and under all circumstances, it would serve as a permanent marker against which the value of everything else could be judged. However, in the real world, no such money exists. The value assigned to money is subjective, not objective. The value of even the best choice of money will be forever in a state of flux due to changes in supply and demand, distance and time, special situations, and the allegiance of users. Most of the time, the changes will be slow, enabling prices to adjust without serious social pain. But changes in the value of money may at times be rapid and troubling. Many people will complain bitterly about the lack of price and monetary stability. In their anxiety, they forget there is nothing stable about the marketplace, and that every item of purchase, including the money used to make the purchase, is in a constant state of value adjustment.

When market changes are outlawed, as governments are prone to do, stresses are stored up until they reach a breaking point. The situation is analogous to energy stored along a geologic fault line. At some point the fault releases the energy, and an earthquake ensues. Long term, little is accomplished by trying to stabilize prices. Indeed, the long-term consequences are always negative.

Within the pages of economic history there is now recorded a wealth of experiences, both good and bad, regarding fiduciary exchange media. It is time to start applying the lessons learned so the mistakes of the past as well as the monetary quagmires of the present can be avoided. The guideposts of what not to use as money now point clearly and boldly in a definite direction.

It is clear the best choice of money, in spite of its limitations, is gold. Gold as money is consistent with reality, truth, and the Universal and Unifying Morality. It is outside the grasp of unscrupulous politicians, bankers, and other manipulators, and is limited in quantity by a market feature everyone recognizes as neutral. Beautiful, desirable, durable, easily malleable, limited in quantity, and universally recognized, there is nothing that is gold’s equal.

Irredeemable fiat currencies come and go with sickening regularity, never failing to leave ruin in their wake. But the first gold coin ever struck has never had anything but beauty and value attributed to it. Since gold cannot be printed, and in a pure gold economy, debt is limited to the amount of gold people are freely willing to save and make available to the loan market, gold ensures that all commercial dealings and interpersonal monetary relationships will remain within the bounds of the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth and the Universal and Unifying Morality. Though gold may have drawbacks in terms of convenience, history has proved that any obfuscation of gold as money is an act of economic and social devolution.

Under a system of real and honest money based on gold bars, gold coinage, and a freely convertible proxy currency, both individuals and governments will find it difficult to spend beyond their means. Such reckless behavior will be quickly discovered and penalized.

In a gold-based economy, thoughtful and conscientious people work hard and save to acquire homes and other essentials for living. They acquire belongings only as they can afford them. They understand that any attempt to spend beyond their means will elicit penalties, and force them to retrace steps along the path of life. A one hundred percent gold-referenced money also forces government to exercise the same kind of discipline. A well-administered and honest government provides infrastructure and services to the citizenry only as it is able to obtain the means of doing so through taxation.

There will always be a segment of society clamoring for the government to do more, for there is no limit to unsatisfied wants. Well-meaning people will argue with great passion that children, the poor, and the elderly are not being adequately served. In a gold-based economy, when government officials, in their attempts to quiet the clamoring, cause the government to spend more in one area, the result will be an inability to complete projects and provide promised services in other areas. When society at large wants government to do more, it must be willing to immediately pay more. Those who believe that government responsibilities should be expanded must carry their arguments to their fellow citizens, not to government officials.

Saving in terms of either physical gold or the gold proxy currency is encouraged by market-driven interest rates and individual preferences. Consumption is made commensurate with the desire and ability to purchase products made available in the marketplace. Saving and consumption find a balance. What is made available in the marketplace will be determined by its mass appeal and affordability. The marketplace will become oriented toward producing those things that are most desired by the populace, and can be sold at a price most people will be able and willing to pay.

Gold is also the best form of money for purposes of international trade, travel, and investment. Gold is universally recognized and trusted as money, and its use as an international exchange media will bring trust and prosperity to all concerned. To facilitate international trade, travel, and investment, international trading banks will accept physical gold deposits in exchange for gold proxy certificates. As the certificates are dispersed in foreign countries through usage, they will be exchanged for the local currency at OCPMMS or equivalent offices (see Part Four, Chapter One, Section 23) then sent back to the issuing trade bank for redemption in gold when it is convenient to do so. To keep their ledgers current and meaningful, and to prevent their gold proxy certificates from being used for unintended and counter-productive purposes, the trading banks will periodically, perhaps every five years or so, start using certificates with an entirely new look to them. They will then call in the old ones for redemption in gold, and declare them invalid after the passage of a certain length of time. Countries using the trading banks must take care to disallow any use of the fractional reserve concept that would allow for the creation of currency or credit not backed by gold. International trading banks must never be privately owned. Rather, they should be owned and operated by the nations using them.

Should a nation’s imports exceed its exports, gold will flow out of the country and less gold will be available to pay for additional imports. As the domestic gold supply shrinks, its domestic unit value will increase as will the unit value of the domestic gold proxy currency. The prices of all locally produced goods and services, including the price of labor, will tend to decline and citizens will be less inclined to use their gold to purchase additional imports. Imports will slow, and less gold will flow out of the country. Conversely, people in other countries will see an advantage in buying more cheaply produced products, and exports will rise. Gold will tend to flow back into the country in question.

Should a nation’s exports exceed its imports, gold will flow into the country, and more gold will be available to purchase imports. As the domestic gold supply increases, its domestic unit value will decrease as will the unit value of the domestic gold proxy currency. The prices of all locally produced goods and services, including the price of labor, will tend to rise and citizens will be more inclined to use their gold to purchase additional imports. As imports rise, more gold will flow out of the country. Conversely, people in other countries will see a disadvantage in buying more expensively produced products, and exports will tend to decline. Less gold will flow into the country in question. What is called the “balance of payments” will be self-regulating.

An economy that uses gold as money will occasionally suffer economic disruptions because of a sudden change in the value of gold. However, such disruptions must be put in perspective. Generally speaking, a gold-based economy will be far more stable than will an economy that uses artificial and dishonest fiat currency. Moreover, a gold-based economy can last forever, whereas an artificial and dishonest fiat currency economy will always lead toward economic and social breakdown.

Real and honest money (gold) begets a real and honest economy, characterized by realistic and honest appraisals of what is feasible or not feasible. An artificial and dishonest fiat currency, capable of being printed in unlimited quantities, begets an artificial and dishonest economy characterized by artificially low interest rates and an inflated view of what is feasible. In such an economy, reality and truth are sent into exile where they are out of sight and out of mind. Mal-investment, mal-placement of labor, and general overreaching in all aspects of economic endeavor that the future will not support follow as a direct result. Only the illusion of wealth flows from the currency printing press. Real wealth cannot be created by such a simple process. There are good reasons why private citizens are not allowed to print their own paper currency. Those reasons do not stop at the doorstep of government.

The governing constitution must be strongly worded with respect to money. The constitution should authorize the government to encourage and promote gold bars, gold coinage, and a one-hundred percent gold-backed proxy paper currency as money, nothing else. However, if people want to use something other than gold as money, they should be free to do so. The constitution should not stand in the way. Silver, for example, has enjoyed a long history as money and many people prefer it over gold since it has traditionally been less expensive than gold and can be more easily divided into smaller and more useful denominations.

If the government were to endorse the use of silver as money along with gold, by inference it would be responsible for dictating the exchange rate between gold and silver in order to force price stability between the two metals, but that is something citizens should never allow their government to do. A government that dictates prices is usurping authority not given to it by the citizenry. It is in violation of the concept of government as a component of the division of labor as well as the Universal and Unifying Morality. Those citizens who insist on using silver as money will have to adapt to the constantly changing value relationship between gold and silver. The same must hold true for any other form of money citizens might choose to use. The constitution must also make clear that the government shall support a one hundred percent gold proxy paper currency easily exchangeable for gold, and that the option to use physical gold as money must always be available to all market participants on all occasions.

It’s not hard to imagine the confusion that would ensue in the absence of government leadership and promotion of gold as money. Any number of businesses would enter into the money production fray. Banks and mints would strike coins made of various precious metals and in various denominations and offer them into a market where they know they will be used. Numerous banks would each offer their own version of paper money in whatever denominations the local population favored.

The various forms of money will generate wide-spread stress and confusion. What is the best money to use in an exchange? Which is most convenient? What is the weight of the precious metals contained in each of the various coins that might be used in the exchange? What are their guarantees? In a world where numerous banks and mints are offering coinage, how can fraudulent coins be identified? As defective and fraudulent coins spread across jurisdictional boundaries, whose job is it to protect the public against fraudulent coinage. What are the current exchange rates between the various precious metals? How is the exchange rate determined? Against what standard or standards are they being compared?

In the case of a paper currency, what determines its value? Is it a currency that is widely recognized and accepted? What is the reputation of the currency? If a user wants to get rid of it, what can it be redeemed for? Is there a redemption fee? Is the redemption process easy or difficult?

If a faraway merchant wants to sell goods into the local market, what kind of money should the merchant insist on as payment? Obviously, the question of payment cannot be left to the customer. The customer would be happy to pay the merchant with the least trustworthy of the money in his possession. To protect his business, the merchant will insist on the most trustworthy, widely used, and easily exchangeable money available in the local economy. The most logical choice is the most trustworthy of gold bars and coins, or an equally trustworthy one hundred percent gold-backed proxy currency that is easily redeemable.

Even the local populace would quickly tire of the numerous species of money to choose from. Over the long term, they, too, will look for monetary consistency and dependability. They will drift toward the use of gold as money. That is why the government should exercise its leadership, and promote the use of gold as money, nothing else.

Assuming the above scenario, the question arises, how are goods and services to be priced and paid for? During the transition period from a dollar system to a full gold and gold proxy currency system, there will have to be two pricing and payment systems. The first system, in terms of dollars, is the one everyone is familiar with. The second system will have to be referenced to the price of gold whatever that price is at on any given day. The second system is more involved than the first and it will take shoppers and business owners some time to get used to it.

Starting from a unity bill which will have a value equal to one troy ounce of gold, the one hundred percent gold proxy bills will be denominated in terms of positive and negative powers of ten.

For example, if the price of one troy ounce of gold was set at $1,250.00.

The bill with the label of Unity will have a value of $1,250.00.

On the up side:

A bill with a label of base ten to the first power (101) will have a value of $12,500.

A bill with a label of base ten to the second power (102) will have a value of $125,000,

and so on.

On the down side:

A bill with a label of base ten to the minus first power (10-1) will have a value of $125.00.

A bill with a label of base ten to the minus second power (10-2) will have a value of $12.50.

A bill with a label of base ten to the minus third power (10-3) will have a value of $1.25.

A bill with a label of base ten to the minus fourth power (10-4) will have a value of $0.125.

A bill with a label of base ten to the minus fifth power (10-5) will have a value of $0.0125,

and so on.

Most grocery items will be priced in terms of (10-2) bills to (10-5) bills, while department stores items may include one or more (10-1) bills.

More expensive items will be paid for with bills labeled in progressively higher positive powers of ten.

Should the price of gold increase dramatically in the future, bills will have to be issued deeper into the negative exponents.

For debit card users with bank accounts denominated in terms of gold proxy currency, software will make payments a painless experience.

It must be hoped that active cash, savings, and investments will find a balance beneficial to all.

International moneychangers bent on world domination and unfriendly nations will try to sabotage the above system. Ways must be found to deal with them while discouraging future transgressions. In the case of an individual or business entity domiciled inside the country, tactics might include seeking redress through the Judiciary’s Bureau of Litigation (see Part Four, Chapter One, Section 15). In the case of an individual, mega-wealthy family, or business entity located outside the country, the President and the Legislature’s Foreign Relations and Military Strategies Committee (see Part Four, Chapter Two, Section 3) could seek redress through the countries in which they are located. If it is an offending nation, the President and the Foreign Relations and Military Strategies Committee could seek help from other nations and/or redress through the International Court of Justice.

 

Section 5. Government and Taxation

A moral government seeks to minimize the financial burden it must impose on the citizenry. A moral government is an honest government. It delivers the best possible government at the lowest possible cost. It does not hide its various costs from the citizenry, nor does it create currency or take on debt to cover costs. A moral government will finance all of its programs on a pay-as-you-go basis, and will spend only that which it has previously taxed.

A moral tax performs two functions. First and foremost, a moral tax system is a means of communication. It communicates the burden of government to the citizenry. That the tax rate may be in accordance with the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth, the Universal and Unifying Morality, and of government as a component of the division of labor, it must be a uniform tax rate. The sting must be felt by all tax-payers in the same way and to the same degree. It is the only means of creating a workable feedback loop whereupon government spending is restrained by tax-payer intolerance of the tax rate as indicated by their choices at the voting booth. Equal taxation is a moral and economic dictate, and understanding the burden of government is a prime responsibility of every citizen. Indeed, it is the most vital piece of information voters take to the voting booth. Citizens who are denied this vital information are not only voting blind on election-day; they are being made fools of by their political leaders and allowing their government’s long-term viability to be undermined. Secondly, the tax system provides the government with the funds it needs to operate.

The manner in which taxes are collected is also important. The method must emphasize simplicity, and minimize paperwork and intrusion into the private affairs of citizens. It must also be capable of rapidly adjusting to the changing needs of government.

The only tax capable of meeting the above criteria is a national, consumption (sales) tax, to be levied at the final purchase level. The word consumption will be interpreted in the broad sense. If the final purchase level is unclear, it will be levied at the next higher level. Questionable situations should comply with the intent of the law as closely as possible

A national sales tax makes every merchant a tax collector, and the government taxing authority must therefore have an accounting from every merchant, whether legal or illegal. In a highly automated and largely compliant society, a sales tax is also one of the most effort minimizing and effective means of collecting taxes, and it gives the government the flexibility it needs to quickly adjust the tax rate to changing circumstances. Some adjustments to the tax code can be made, but they must be kept to a bare minimum. It is absolutely essential that all voting citizens understand in the same way and to the same degree, what the burden of government is.

The following image should be deeply imbedded in the mind of every voting citizen.

 

 

A government supported solely by a uniform national sales tax will, over two or three election cycles, find a percentage point on the scale representing its ability to spend, while still maintaining the willing support of the citizenry in the democratic sense. While many citizens will not be happy with the cost of government or the benefits they derive from their government at the chosen level, they are willing to tolerate the will of the majority. They recognize the value of living in a well-functioning democracy where their vote is influential.

Many people will find a national final user sales tax an obnoxious system for collecting taxes, especially merchants; but all systems of taxation are obnoxious and, of all forms of taxation, a national sales tax can best keep taxpayers in touch with economic reality. With every purchase, citizens will be reminded of how much their government is costing them.

For people living under a government that is not bound by the above taxing constraint, the situation is very different. The point at which citizens are freely willing to support their government is obscured and dispersed up and down the scale by a progressive income tax, numerous other taxes, tax credits, subsidies, welfare payments, money printing, and debt accumulation, etc. No one can imagine where the support level might be. Indeed, legislators employ every means of hiding true costs from the citizenry so as not to suffer their displeasure. Those who would limit the size of government are disarmed. When the cost of government is hidden from view, the calculations of cost versus need will always become skewed in the direction of need. Base emotions overwhelm questions of honest feasibility and prudence. Citizens feel free of constraints, and demand more benefits from those they place into high political offices. Politicians also feel free to advocate higher spending levels.

Historically, many nations have taxed on the basis of a progressive income scale. Under this concept, the wealthy are required to pay a higher percentage of their income than the less wealthy, so the less wealthy may enjoy the benefits thereby. Many people will say it is only a matter of fairness and justice. The wealthy should be required to pay more, they say, by virtue of their wealth. However, when morality is compromised by avarice, what is left of the word morality? When justice is applied unevenly, what is left of the word justice? When righteousness is declared relative and can be compromised away by assigning it to situations in which one person can be victimized by another, what is left of the word righteousness? A progressive income tax obfuscates the individual’s share of the burden of government, corrupts the concept of government as a component of the division of labor, and turns government into an instrument of legalized plunder. When important words are stripped of their real and true meaning, reason suffers, and society gravitates into devolution. It should be remembered that even with a uniform national consumption tax, the more-wealthy will always pay more than the less-wealthy, often by high multiples.

Why should the burden of government be a mystery? In all other circumstances, when individuals have need of something they have cost in mind. An article of clothing, food for the table, shelter from the elements, utility bills, a bed to sleep in, providing for dependents, a little luxury now and then, all of these things and more, engage the mind in a wild dance between cost and need. Should not the cost of government, one of the most important determinants of secure living, be similarly understood? If it is accepted that government is a component of the division of labor, should not the cost of that particular component of labor be understood just as the cost of other components are understood? How many people buy a pair of shoes, a bag of groceries, or rent an apartment with no consideration given as to cost? Is it not a gross abandonment of personal and social responsibility to accept government without an understandable price tag?

Without a uniform understanding of the burden of government by the citizenry, viable and sustainable democracy will always remain an elusive goal. Citizens and government alike embark on an erratic journey marked by ever-increasing social benefits, budget deficits, money printing, debt accumulation, and a burgeoning, wealth consuming governing bureaucracy. Unburdened by the worry of cost, everything is possible. Theft through the political process is enshrined and the concept of equality before the law is sent into exile. The wild lifestyle will continue until the system is no longer able to support its own weight, then it will collapse.

The tax code should be no more than a small book easily understood by the average citizen. Those who want more government-sponsored social programs, or a greater military, etc., as well as those who do not, can vote their will at election time. Over the long term and in the democratic sense, citizens will have the kind of government they are freely willing to pay for as they go about their daily business, no more and no less.

Corporate profits must never be taxed. When corporate profits are taxed, corporations cannot serve the community as well as they might otherwise do. Ultimately, common people are victimized. Common people pay corporate profit taxes in terms of jobs forgone, goods and services forgone, higher wages forgone, and lower prices forgone. If the corporate profit tax becomes punitive, the directors, as is their duty, will simply move the business to a more appreciative province or country.

The self-punishing nature of the corporate profit tax notwithstanding, it is a favorite among politicians and citizens alike. With large sums of money in sight, avarice triumphs over sound economics and honest thinking. Citizens who support the tax do not understand they are hurting themselves and their country.

Generally, business entities should be expected to pay for their own infrastructural needs through property taxes. Where business infrastructure blends into public infrastructure, costs should be shared. At the local level, the same will be true for individual home owners.

The vitally important feedback loop represented by Figure 1 is wholly missing in today’s world. Not a single country utilizes a uniform national sales tax as the principal means of sustaining the government. It is a major reason the entire world is headed toward financial and social upheaval.

 

Section 6. Government and Bureaucracy

Not enough attention is focused on the nature of large scale bureaucratic management. Naturally occurring events arise out of large-scale bureaucracies just as they arise in the natural setting. Since science seeks to investigate naturally occurring events, large-scale bureaucratic management is a legitimate subject for scientific investigation.

Of necessity, control from the top means bureaucratic control. Certainly a central government bureaucracy will be sizable and weighty. The characteristics of bureaucratic rule are universal and do not change with time or circumstance. A strong leader may upset the bureaucratic applecart once in a while and shake things up; but, like a bowl of jelly, the bureaucracy will soon re-form and become very much like its former self. As the well-being of a large number of employees depends on its continuance and growth, the focus turns inward. When additional money is fed into the system, bureaucratic managers siphon off as much as they dare and use it to fuel the organization they are charged with overseeing. Bureaucracy always satisfies its own avarice first.

Bureaucratic management is always difficult for the common citizen to deal with. It resists change. Change means additional work and upsets the status quo that bureaucrats grow comfortable with. If everything can be kept the same, bureaucratic work is minimized. At best, change is slow. Moreover, bureaucrats are more interested in pandering to those who are above them in rank rather than those considered below them in rank, such as the common citizens they deal with. Employment, wages, and security come from above, not from below. If more wealth is needed to fuel the bureaucracy, an appeal is made to the leadership above, not to the working populace below. Most bureaucracies are not directly exposed to the discipline of the marketplace, and need not worry about making a profit.

It is left to the reader to discover the handful of books devoted to this topic. A thorough understanding of the nature of large-scale bureaucratic management is essential to understanding the corruption and inefficiencies that are ever-present features of socialist institutions.

 

Section 7. Government and Religion

As a component of the division of labor, the central government must be a secular government. Citizens should brook nothing that might be interpreted as religious advocacy or symbolism on any of its properties, in any of its literature, or in any of its rituals. While serving in an official capacity, no government employee should ever espouse any religious cause or dialogue. Religion must be kept forever outside of the governmental purview. In the modern era where there is a great deal of religious intermixing, it cannot be otherwise. As soon as it is sensed that one religion is making inroads into government, government will immediately become a bone of contention for all competing faiths. Order will start to break down, and the land will become increasingly polarized and difficult to govern.

 

Section 8. Government and Law Enforcement

One of the reasons citizens surrender policing authority to government is because government can more easily deal with criminals and those guilty of immoral practices and behaviors. Certainly a well trained and equipped police force can accomplish much more than can a group of untrained and poorly equipped vigilantes, or a single person. A professional police force will be familiar with the legal constraints regarding their work, whereas a citizen group may not be. A professional police force will have the investigative skills, incarceration facilities, and the knowledge and experience to work with those in the judicial sector, whereas a citizen force will not. A police force will also have the authority to work closely with various treatment facilities as the facilities are needed.

As a department of the central government, a central government police force has the same roots as government and is subject to the same moral constraints as any other government agency. A central government police force, therefore, should behave in a manner that is consistent with what is expected from those who are policed. All police officers must be constantly aware of how their organization is rooted in the social framework, and where their authority comes from.

The reason for being of any police force, as well as its authority, comes from the people. The policing authority is an outgrowth of the division of labor, just as the government is an outgrowth of the division of labor. The duty of a police force, therefore, is to serve and protect the people, not to dominate them.

There is no doubt that members of any police force have to walk a fine line. They must at all times be ready to handle the unscrupulous and rough people so often encountered in police work, while at the same time being careful not to tread on the rights of innocent and law-abiding citizens. Surely it is a daunting task. Sometimes, in the heat and excitement of confrontation, it’s hard for a police officer to tell the difference between those who are culprits and those who are not. Innocent people may sometimes get in the way. Moreover, upon arriving on the scene, officers can never be certain about how much resistance they are going to encounter from offenders. There will always be a gray area in which police and offender behavior will be less than optimal. Everyone must work hard to keep this gray area as narrow as possible. Protocols should be created and understood by both sides so violent confrontations can be minimized.

Questionable behavior on the part of police officers must always be investigated in the hope of finding avenues for improvement. Law-abiding citizens can help by cooperating with police officers in every way they can. Crime is everyone’s business. Every responsible citizen must respond aggressively when they witness a crime or come into knowledge of a crime, by contacting the police and surrendering whatever information they possess.

 

Section 9. Government Secret Police and Intelligence Agencies

Secret police forces and intelligence agencies must be viewed by the citizenry with grave suspicion and trepidation. Such policing authorities derive their reason for being as well as their authority, not from the citizenry, but from the government itself. They owe their employment to some bureau of government, or perhaps even to a single person. Their allegiance and accountability are to the government, not the citizenry. Their purpose is to please and serve those above them, not those below. Special policing authorities, therefore, slide easily into the service of despots, and employees of such authorities must remain forever vigilant that their duties and activities do not drag them down into a behavioral quagmire that is at odds with the kind of moral behavior every citizen has a right to expect from all government employees.

When the work of special policing authorities becomes secret, it takes their work outside the view of the legislative branch and more importantly, outside the view of the common citizen. Over time, they easily adopt the dogma, that to do their job well, they must be free of the moral constraints that guide the activities of most other people.

A case may be made for secret policing authorities during wartime, but when they are allowed to exist in peacetime, the citizenry should understand they are playing with fire. They are allowing an important branch of government to set its roots deep into the realm of omnipotent government, and to drift outside of their view and authority.

 

Section 10. Government and War

It is usually desirable that a central government should sponsor a military force that will embody the people’s right to national defense. In times of peace, the military need not be, nor should it be, of a size that will make neighboring nations feel uncomfortable. It should, however, be large enough to organize aid, and maintain order in the case of a calamitous event within the national borders.

If a threat to the national security should reveal itself, an experienced core will be in place, upon which an expanded military may be constructed.

 

Section 11. When War Is Justified

Where people live in freedom, defensive wars are always justified. However, the attacking nation must always be allowed to strike the first blow. Before that final and fateful moment, a possibility exists that war may be averted. An honorable and moral nation will always hope and work for peace until the very moment war is thrust upon them. The picture history paints is very important. Historians will write a moral as well as a factual account of the conflict, and it is important that the honorable and moral nation should be seen as consistently honorable and moral. Readers of history will favor the nation that absorbed the first blow over the nation that delivered it.

Nations may band together to contain an aggressive or rampaging nation, warlord, or tribe. The world should not stand idly by while thousands of innocents are being slaughtered. A moral government will always be supportive of a world council of nations and of their work to maintain world peace. The executive, legislative, and judicial branches of government should stand ready to contribute and fund troops and equipment when the cause is just.

 

Section 12. When War Is Not Justified

Aggressive wars, so-called preemptive wars, and what might be termed policy wars, as for example, anti-drug wars carried into the sovereign territories of other countries, or proxy wars in which funds and equipment are given to a foreign entity engaged in combat, are never justified. The citizenry and those with authority should never permit such a reckless use of a nation’s military might. If it is desirable, for moral purposes, to support a foreign entity with funds and military equipment, it should be done through a world council of nations, never by individual nations.

War is deadly business, and there is a finality to killing that is irreversible. Ambitious or inept leaders have, in the past, initiated many unjust wars that have brought a host of horrors to soldiers and noncombatants alike. They have laid waste to huge landscapes because citizens and people in key positions could not find the courage to say no to those in power and act on their convictions, or because they felt obliged to observe the powerful taboo against challenging the national leadership after the destruction and killing starts.

Wars are easy to start, but can be very messy and difficult to back away from or end. A bad war can bring ruin to the national economy and severely damage the national unity. It can also build a resentment abroad that may not subside for several generations. When a serious international problem arises, time, even several decades of it, should be used as an ally. Often time will correct a problem in a much better way than will a war. Presidents who misuse their authority as commanders of the armed forces should be quickly removed from office by the legislative branch or by a moral council, if one exists, or in the case of their absence or inaction, by massive and pervasive demonstrations of citizens.

A soldier, whether of low or high rank, must never totally surrender his or her individuality to the military leadership. The will of God as expressed in Moral Duty, does not permit it, nor should the First Person Singular ever allow national pride, the excitement of the moment, peer pressure, or fear, to overrule sound moral judgments.

The First Person Singular is the supreme advocate and defender of Moral Duty and behavior. That assignment comes straight from God and there is no escape from it. It is the duty of every soldier, of high or low rank, to judge the righteousness of a war, as well as the righteousness of individual actions he or she is asked to participate in during the course of war. If the judgment is negative and the situation serious enough, it is the Moral Duty of the First Person Singular to act on that judgment. Actions might include refusing to obey orders, casting off the uniform, or taking leave of the battlefield or military unit.

In extreme situations, a soldier might be called upon by righteous Moral Duty to kill the person responsible for a heinous order. This is particularly true in the high echelons of power, but may also apply to lower echelons. It must be assumed such actions will entail heavy penalties, including imprisonment or even execution. While each soldier must choose between the path of righteousness and the path of a tortured conscience, there can be no doubt about the demands of Moral Duty.

It is time to call an end to mindless and unjust wars. Those who would initiate them must be removed from their positions of power or killed. It makes no sense that a single person or a small group of officials should be allowed, without warrant, to let loose a conflict in which cities are destroyed and thousands or millions of people are killed or maimed.

Military intervention or intimidation, concerning issues of land, water, or other resources, is also never justified. The land and resources of other nations, tribes, etc., must always be respected. If one nation suffers from a dearth of a particular commodity that is possessed by a neighboring nation, then honorable and courteous negotiations should be initiated. It is but another reason why relations between all nations must be based on respect, friendship, and goodwill. It is much better if negotiations can start on the basis of friendship rather than animosity. In any case, the nation in want must accept the outcome of the negotiations, whatever they may be.

Nonetheless, the burgeoning human population and the simultaneous decline in the resources needed for its support are bound to precipitate clashes in certain localities and circumstances, between those who have and those who have not. People in desperate need of food, water, or shelter for themselves or their loved ones, will place need above morality and seek to claim what is necessary for survival. There is little to say about such human dilemmas, except that the human population should never be so great as to threaten the resources, in any locality, needed for its survival.

Readers should use their internet connections to personally investigate how wars are made. See References, List One #6,7,8, and List Three, #3.

 

Section 13. The Gray Area

A gray war is a war with uncertain qualities of honor, righteousness, and justification. An honorable and moral government will not contemplate or engage in a gray war. In worst-case situations, soldiers from the general staff on down should refuse to fight, for not a single person is absolved from the requirements of Moral Duty. It is a tenet of Moral Duty that soldiers are not obliged to fight and die under inept leadership or in wars that have tenuous justifications.

 

Section 14. The Popularity of War

The popularity of a war is not a measure of its moral justification. An unjust war may be enormously popular at its inception. There are many examples in history of luminaries raising the national passion for war to a feverish pitch, by displacing moral justification with demagogic rhetoric and powerful military displays. In their excitement, too many people are ready to yield to the national passion. Without consideration, they cast aside both thought and conscience. They leave no room in their imagination for thoughts of the future and the horrors it may hold for them and for their nation. They applaud their leaders and happily send their young, marching proudly away in beautiful uniforms, onto the distant killing fields.

Nor is the popularity for war a constant quantity. The popularity of a war rises and falls, depending on how the battles go, how the cost is felt, and who feels it. Nor can demagogues keep the passion for war at a continuously high pitch. Their bellicose rhetoric wears thin as the casualties, destruction, and monetary costs mount, and citizens slowly begin the process of reconsideration.

The justification for war, on the other hand, is set at the time of the first killing and does not change. Though a discussion of it may not achieve prominence in the concerned nation for many years, and, indeed, discussion may be suppressed and many aspects of the justification withheld from public scrutiny, historians will eventually research it thoroughly and will damn or praise according to what they find. In a defensive war, righteousness yields to necessity, and the issue of popularity is moot. In any case, the word popularity and the word righteousness are not synonyms.

The First Person Singular must be an independent thinker. She or he must rise above the noise and intensity of national passions and see beyond what appears in the mass media and what is heard from the national leadership or from teachers, loved ones, or peers. It is the moral responsibility of the First Person Singular to sit down in a quiet place and think only in terms of Moral Duty, the Universal and Unifying Morality, and with due consideration and understanding given for the point of view of potential opponents, while judging the justification for war. No emperor, king, queen, religious cleric, dictator, president, legislative body, or even society at large, has the right to make this judgment for the First Person Singular.

It is as a call from God.

 

Back to Top

 

 

****

 

 

Chapter Four

The Siren Calls

 

Section 1. The Conscious Management of Society from the Top (Socialism)

There is no doubt humankind owes much to science. As recently as two hundred years ago, people could not conceive of entire cities being lit up at night, automobiles speeding along concrete highways, huge passenger aircraft flying through the air, instant and portable communications to anywhere on the planet, television, machines that can see with great detail inside a living body, telescopes that peer to the very edge of the universe, and robots that explore other planets and send detailed information, including high resolution photographs, back to earth. From the most esteemed halls of academia to the least educated of citizens, everyone is enamored with science and the methodology responsible for bringing forth all of these great miracles. Every great invention can be traced to an individual or small group of individuals consciously managing the forces and substances of nature to achieve the ends sought.

Surely, it is reasoned, if the conscious management of the forces and substances of nature can yield such miracles, then conscious management in the social sphere will yield similar miracles. Surely the conscious management of society from the top by intelligent, well-meaning, well-educated, and devoted people will yield more prosperity, a superior distribution of wealth and income, superior educational opportunities, superior healthcare systems, and much greater happiness for all, than could possibly be achieved by the presumed randomness and uncaring nature of a free market economy. In the minds of social engineering believers, it has always been a dream waiting to come true. This, in spite of a long history of failed attempts and warnings by a small group of economists that economic management from the top is unworkable and can appear to work only so long as there is wealth available to be consumed.

Undeterred, the purveyors of social engineering press onward. They insist previous experiments have failed because of this or that reason, and there is nothing basically wrong with the idea of management from the top. Even if their dreams fall short in some respects they insist, as in a lack of freedom for individuals, the ways in which it might succeed, as in low cost or no cost housing, food, and healthcare for all, etc., are far more important. They believe it is better for all if social energies can be channeled, if need be by force, in ways people at the top believe will maximize benefits for the general populace.

 

Section 2. Two Paths to Management from the Top

Two paths have been and are being followed in attempts to make the utopian dream of socialism come true. The first path involves the revolutionary and violent overthrow of the existing order of society followed by the establishment of an all-powerful socialist state. It is, after all, implicit in the idea of the conscious management of society that an individual, or a group of bureaucrats, must be perched at the top to tell everyone else what to do.

If large numbers of people are astonished at their sudden loss of freedom and resist the dictates of their government, then those at the top must either abandon their dream of creating a well-ordered, prosperous, and happy society, or they must force people into compliance so the dream can be realized. It is for this reason that socialist states created out of revolution and violence will always be dictatorships based on intimidation and violence.

The second path consists of the pursuit of the socialist dream through the democratic process. Though a democratic government may start out limited in scope, there is always a strong tendency for it to take on social responsibilities. Several factors, involving both politicians and the citizenry, are always at work promoting the perceived need for bigger and more involved government. Though people cherish freedom, they do not cherish the individual responsibilities that necessarily ensue. They want to pass the heavier duties associated with freedom onto the higher, collective authority of government, just as they assign the responsibilities of defending the realm and keeping the peace to the government. They want the comfort of believing the worst-case pitfalls of life will be mitigated, and those who are unable or unwilling to care for themselves will be provided the help that is needed. They want the government to educate their children, take care of aged parents, provide for family members who suffer illnesses or accidents, and take care of the poor. Economies of scale and the power to tax would seem to point toward government as the logical center for remedial action, and always there are politicians ready to champion what the populace is clamoring for.

Young children and poor, disabled, or elderly people can always be found who are in need of assistance, and the socialist maxim that government, rather than private institutions, should provide for such people is accepted throughout a large part of the contemporary human landscape. These are enticing and powerful desires and unless they are constrained by a strong moral system, a strong constitution, and honest money, it is unlikely any democratic government will exist for very long without becoming socialistic to some degree.

All of the above social concerns can be addressed outside of government by voluntary organizations funded by concerned and generous citizens. But it is not enough for the socialists. They want to eliminate the uncertainty of privately funded social programs. They do not recognize that uncertainty is an essential element for the success of any program designed to help people.

 

Section 3. The Question of Planning

People who believe in the conscious management of society from the top condemn the free marketplace for its perceived lack of planning. In their minds, planning necessarily comes from the top. That means a governing bureaucracy must always be visible. Since there is no visible bureaucracy guiding the free marketplace, that surely, is proof of the absence of planning. They cannot conceive of a system of planning that springs from the bottom of the economic structure. Yet that is precisely what happens when people freely exchange goods and services at agreed upon prices.

In the free marketplace, individuals do their own planning without the aid of bureaucrats. Over time they select the most highly regarded exchange media. In every niche and corner of the economy, individual decisions are made to take a job or pass it by, to establish a business or wait for a better opportunity, to buy or not to buy a loaf of bread, a can of soup, a pair of shoes, a liter of fuel, or an automobile or home. As consumers, entrepreneurs, and owners of natural resources interact in response to their mutual desires, a price edifice slowly emerges that reflects the relative desires of customers who are ready to buy, the desire and need of entrepreneurs for profit, the degree of difficulty of bringing specific goods or services to market, as well as interest rates and the value of the agreed-upon exchange media unit. Over time, the price edifice becomes very detailed.

Moreover, contributing decisions, to mine or not mine, pump or not pump, build or not build, produce or not produce, hire or not hire, take a job or not take a job, buy or not buy, and borrow or not borrow, are made at locations where specific knowledge and experience are at their highest levels, which is to say at the well heads, in the mines, in ore processing plants, production plants, saw mills, local banks, transportation centers, various offices, and, especially, at the individual level, whether as an entrepreneur, consumer, or laborer. From the tiniest screw used in watch-making, to the largest piece of plate steel used in shipbuilding, from the simple delivery of a newspaper to the most sophisticated of medical services, the price of every item or service in the marketplace can be anticipated with a reasonable degree of accuracy. Short-term and long-term interest rates are also market driven and understood.

Economic knowledge is not something that can be consciously gathered together and presented before a committee of bureaucrats. Economic knowledge exists only as tiny bits and pieces of information, often involving nothing more than the gut feelings of tens of millions of economic participants dispersed throughout the full width and breadth of the economic landscape. The manner in which individuals think, work, buy and sell, or barter their skills and talents, reflects their knowledge and understanding of what they desire, what is available, what is affordable, and what they consider to be feasible and just. The only way these myriad bits and pieces of information and knowledge can be gathered together and put to use is through a free and continually evolving price edifice, which in turn can be used by entrepreneurs to calculate product feasibility, profit and loss, the best ways of putting things together, the profitability of parts and material purchases, as well as the viability and price of the smallest to the largest of would-be projects. The free market economy is both efficient and democratic, since prices reflect economic reality and are also determined by a multitude of decisions freely made at the individual level.

The vast majority of people who call themselves socialists, including many who are highly educated and earnestly devoted to the improvement of the social welfare, do not understand the nature or importance of the price edifice. They see unsatisfied needs and wants in every direction and believe they are due to the random and aimless nature of the free market economy.

However, no bureaucracy, even with the aid of the most powerful computers and comprised of the most dedicated and sincere public servants, can possibly duplicate the treasure trove of information that is contained in a freely arrived at price edifice. It is certainly ludicrous for anyone to believe that a bureaucrat, sitting in a plush office somewhere, could be in possession of this near infinite volume of information, or even if it was possible, would know what to do with it. To obtain the information would require monitoring what goes on in the minds of hundreds of millions or even billions of marketplace participants. The information would then have to be processed. Pray tell, how could this be done? After that, those same hundreds of millions, or even billions of people would have to be told what to do for every moment they are not asleep.

In reality, socialists do not try to replicate the workings of the market economy. Since they do not understand how it works, they see no reason to try. They simply issue orders and create bureaucracies, and hope things will move in the direction of the dreams they harbor in their minds. But without a market-driven price edifice, how can anyone know what is the best and most efficient manner of putting things together? How can the economic feasibility of this or that project be determined with any degree of accuracy? How can scarce resources be allocated to their best possible use? How can the best skills of individuals be utilized? What are the desires of the great masses, or does it matter? What would they buy if they were free to choose?

Without the price information only a free marketplace can generate, market management from the top is reduced to a gigantic guessing game and the use of force. Perhaps it is easier now to understand that when socialists try to manage society from the top, the result is always a comedy of errors, a grossly inefficient economy, and terrible unhappiness and suffering for large numbers of people.

Planning at the top then, cannot be supported by a presumed lack of planning in the free market economy. The question of planning is reduced to the question, who shall do the planning? Shall the planning come from the top under the direction of a supposedly omniscient leader or group of leaders, where the desires of the individual citizens do not count for anything and where individual initiatives are not permitted? Or shall it come from below, at the individual level, and under a system of freedom? Alas, there are still great multitudes desirous of planning from the top.

 

Section 4. An Undesirable Consequence

There is another consequence of the government acting as a social provider that is extremely damaging. Government welfare largesse suppresses the founding and growth of privately funded charitable institutions. As big government assumes more responsibilities for the social well-being, it is natural for the general populace to feel less inclined to be responsible for the same thing. Big government necessarily taxes heavily, and frustrated citizens feel they have little left over for private charity. Big government, therefore, corrupts one of the most noble features of the human character, which is to say the desire to give an appropriate portion of one’s time, knowledge, experience, and fortune to those who are truly in need. With private charity the relationship between giver and recipient is deeply felt, the funds are limited, their use carefully monitored, and their future availability questionable. Recipients will be more likely to use the donated funds and services sparingly and wisely.

 

Section 5. The Quest for a Third Alternative

Some people speak of a third alternative. They ask, “Why not take the best of both worlds? Why not make the best use of the freely arrived at price edifice and economic calculation, while mitigating, through a variety of social programs, the most prominent failures of the free market economy?”

However, there is no workable third unconstrained alternative. To say government should be responsible for the poor, the elderly, the ill, the unlucky, and the irresponsible is to assign an open-ended task to government. There is no inherent point beyond which government should not go. Always there will be more poor, more ill, more elderly, more children, more unlucky, and more irresponsible people who need help.

Government social services are perceived as free by people who make use of them, and services perceived as free develop a need that knows no limit. Government social service bureaucracies, therefore, will always be faced with the need for expansion. Citizens will always demand the government do more, and there will always be politicians ready to respond to the public clamor. Moreover, the need for expansion makes government social service employees feel they are doing important work. It also makes them feel secure in their jobs. They want to see new clients at their window, and they want to keep the clients they already have. The last thing they want to see is the need for their services to be reduced or disappear. Their security depends on the expansion of their clientele and a continuing need for the bureaucracy of which they are a part.

Other factors will exacerbate the problem. People working and living marginally above the group receiving help will tend to gravitate into the group to take advantage of its benefits, as will people living in other states or countries. As government assumes more welfare responsibilities, recipients will feel less inclined to be responsible for their own welfare, for above all else, the government programs allow individuals to shirk responsibilities that would otherwise fall to them. Moreover, government must extract wealth from the economy to pay for the costs of its social programs, in terms of both the bureaucracies needed to provide the services, and the people receiving the services. While wealth left within the market economy is capable of generating more wealth, wealth extracted from the market economy to pay for government social services is consumed. The net result is a drag on the economy and on society at large. As the burden of heavy government takes its toll on the economy, more people find themselves in need of help, and the problem grows commensurately.

Perhaps the most powerful factor acting against the viability of an unconstrained so-called third system has to do with the question of money. Advocates of a third system will quickly act against the restraints of gold. The inability to print gold and the credit limitations of gold will frustrate their every move. They will demand the use of irredeemable fiat currency that can be created without limit. Without fail, the use of such money will precipitate a slow to rapid descent into full-blown socialism and omnipotent government. The so-called third alternative is revealed as an illusion. It is simply socialism starting out small. It follows that any attempt to create a so-called third political system is destined to fail.

 

Section 6. The Possibility for Limited and Sustainable Socialism

Since large numbers of people, often a majority, are in favor of social benefit programs, the programs can be justified on democratic grounds and as a matter of compromise and political expediency. It is, after all, an imperfect world, and morality is the art and practice of the First Person Singular getting along with all other people, not necessarily in an ideal relationship, but in a relationship that will keep the peace. As long as social benefit programs are voluntary in the democratic sense; do not wantonly betray the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth, the Universal and Unifying Morality, honest money, private property, the market economy; and are constrained by a system whereupon the government spends only that which it has previously obtained through taxation, there is no reason to condemn them.

However, the “do not wantonly betray the Universal and Unifying Morality” is an important factor. To prevent its betrayal, recipients of government welfare payments must be disenfranchised. It should not be possible, nor is it moral, for people to vote themselves benefits others will be forced to pay for.

Citizens beware! Once socialist legislation is accepted as an operating feature of government, it is difficult to contain. The same argument that brought forth the first piece of socialist legislation can be used to extend it, as well as call forth a host of new social service enactments. Socialists always want more than there is, and unscrupulous bureaucrats will try to utilize machinations involving debt, paper money production and other devious practices, to satisfy the utopian dreams of the citizenry. In the complexities of a large national economy, there is much that can be hidden from view. It must be emphasized that the realization of the utopian dream can only be temporary. The conscious management of society from the top will always lead to the perversion of economic calculation, a loss of productive efficiency, large scale fiat currency production, unpayable debt, and eventual ruin.

Just as the legendary sea nymphs lured, with their hauntingly beautiful calls, unsuspecting sailors onto the rocks and to their deaths, so does the siren call of the conscious management of society from the top (socialism) lure unsuspecting nations onto the rocks, there to lay them low.

 

Section 7. The Word Should

When a society is enamored with the socialist ideology, the people come to believe that everything can be accomplished through legislation. Their fantasies know no limitations. The ideas of cost and affordability are pushed into the background where they are not bothersome. If government can be persuaded to bestow benefits upon the citizenry, let the government worry about the costs. Every perceived need is assigned a should. Pregnant women should be provided free prenatal care. Every child should be provided a free education. The poor should be provided adequate housing. The old and disabled should be provided for, etc. The statements become a rallying cry for voters and the politicians who cater to them.

The world of perfection can be achieved, people believe, if only government officials could be persuaded to pass the right kind of laws. One after another, the should(s) are enacted and become the law of the land. Smiling people put their faith in government and shun the lessons of sound economics. Bureaucracy thrives. Government can make dreams come true and magically find ways of paying for them.

The purveyors of should construct a fantasy world of perfection and use it as a standard to judge what they see in the real and imperfect world. They pursue a system whereby citizens can enjoy all the benefits of freedom while pushing all of the complementary responsibilities and costs of freedom onto the government. However, as the government takes on those responsibilities and costs, it must increasingly limit the freedom of individuals, find ways of surreptitiously depriving them of their wealth, tear away at their future, and destroy the well-being of their great-grandchildren.

As the decades pass, the costs of the various should programs, along with their supporting bureaucracies, escalate exponentially. Citizens watch as their government grows ever more weighty and overbearing. They see its voracious appetite for the wealth generated and saved by productive citizens. At some point, the money presses start to turn out currency in troubling quantities, and debt is accumulated beyond the level of prudence. As additional years roll by, huge government debts are accumulated, and vast quantities of newly printed fiat currency are thrown into the marketplace and banking system to keep the economy afloat. Still, cries of various should(s) reverberate from one end of the land to the other.

The purveyors of should do not realize that the social utopia of their dreams can only be achieved for a brief period of time by bankrupting the supporting structure. Reality cannot be permanently overruled. Economic life is not a matter of what anyone thinks should be or ought to be. Economic life is a matter of facing reality, of working hard, saving hard, living frugally, and of accomplishing the most of what is possible given the available resources, while preserving that which will be needed by future generations. While it is true many good things flow from the pursuance of the word should, a viable economic system is not one of them.

Just as the legendary sea nymphs lured, with their hauntingly beautiful calls, unsuspecting sailors onto the rocks and to their deaths, so does the siren call of the word should lure unsuspecting nations onto the rocks, there to lay them low.

 

Section 8. The Word Right

It is often said by people of righteous and caring intent, that in any society that calls itself advanced or modern, not a single citizen should be living in a state of dire need or want. Every child should have the right to a free education, everyone should have the right to a decent job, everyone should have the right to affordable housing, everyone should have the right to healthcare when it is needed, and everyone should have the right to adequate food.

An important clue to the validity of the above assertions is that each of them contains the word should. There is, however, a second important point to be made. True moral rights are neutral. They do not impose undue burdens upon other people. The right to be free of threats and violence, the right to have one’s property respected, the right to be treated with respect and courtesy by other people, the right to vote, the right to participate in government, and the right to practice the religion of one’s choice, are examples of true moral rights. True moral rights are rights that people freely grant each other that all may be treated equally and live free of threats and violence.

However, the right to a free education, the right to a so-called decent job, the right to a so-called livable wage, the right to affordable housing, the right to healthcare when it is needed, and the right to adequate food all infer that some entity must provide the wealth that is needed for the realization of said rights. If the wealth that is needed comes from private, voluntary sources, all is well and good, but that will usually not be the case. The general assumption is that the wealth will come from government. But government has no wealth of its own. Government will have to forcefully expropriate wealth and income from taxpayers in order that the rights may be realized. So-called rights that extract a forced payment from a second party are not true moral rights. They are pseudo rights. To say person “A” has a moral and legal right to the wealth of person “B” is to obfuscate morality, and sanctify theft through the political process. Theft is theft, even when it is perpetrated by government.

People who tout pseudo rights may sound like righteous and caring people, but they confuse both themselves and their listeners. Morality cannot be brushed aside because groups of individuals have a need for something. To try to organize a society based on need is to abandon morality and accept theft through the political process as a way of life. For every person presented with freedom from want, a second person is forced to pay, and languishes in bondage.

Pseudo rights are sometimes expressed in terms of freedom. Self-righteous luminaries will say common people should have freedom from various wants, such as freedom from hunger, freedom from homelessness, freedom from curable diseases, and freedom from ignorance, etc. It is easy for unscrupulous luminaries to hawk such pseudo causes. As they gaze at their audience, they see excited and smiling faces of people who want free or low cost goods and services. Neither speaker nor listeners give a thought to those who will be forced to bear the costs. Is it not true that any fool with a flair for words can do as much? Is it not true unthinking listeners can applaud them?

Just as the legendary sea nymphs lured, with their hauntingly beautiful calls, unsuspecting sailors onto the rocks and to their deaths, so does the siren call of pseudo rights lure unsuspecting nations onto the rocks, there to lay them low.

 

Section 9. Price Controls

Two types of price controls must be considered, those that would price a commodity above what the market would otherwise allow, and those that would price a commodity below what the market would otherwise allow.

When the government sets the price of a commodity above what the market would otherwise allow, usually to placate an industry and obtain its votes, the consumption of the commodity will usually be reduced. Fewer people are willing to buy the commodity at the higher price. The government, therefore, in order to prevent unemployment in the sector, must purchase and store or otherwise dispose of, the full quantity of goods that consumers are not willing to purchase at the higher price.

At the same time the government is acquiring goods it does not know what to do with, entrepreneurs are gearing up to take full advantage of the higher price. They will increase production of the commodity in question to the level that will yield them the maximum profit. Under the government edict, therefore, market consumption is reduced, while production is increased, an inherently untenable situation. Nonetheless, when politicians see there are political advantages to be gained by setting prices high, economic reasoning is brushed aside.

Effects will ripple throughout the economy. Productive capital will flow into the industry in question and away from other uses that are also important. Those people who have need of the commodity in question will have to get by with less of it, or abandon its use altogether.

The idea of acquiring and storing an endless stream of produce puts the government in a quandary. Almost anything it does with the commodity, short of destroying it, will serve to undermine the very market it is trying to placate. Sometimes, if the commodity in question is a food item, or some other item in desperate need by people who would not otherwise purchase it, the government may, in its infinite wisdom, and in order to reduce its ever-growing stockpile, bestow an appropriate amount of the commodity to those in need. In the same manner, it may bestow a gift to people in need outside of the given country. At some point, however, to avoid embarrassing accumulation, the government will have to extend its reach into the marketplace and decree production limits on the commodity in question.

When the government prices a commodity below what the market would otherwise allow, usually to placate consumers and obtain their votes, it finds itself in a quandary once again. At the lower price, demand for the commodity swells, but adequate production is nowhere to be found. Experienced entrepreneurs know better than to produce something at a loss. Now the government must choose. If it tries to force the industry to operate at a loss, investors will quickly withdraw their capital from the industry in question and the government will have to take over the industry or be defeated. An alternative is to subsidize the producers to make up for the losses they will incur if they were to sell their product at the artificially low price. It does this most easily by buying the commodity at the market price, then reselling it at the controlled (lower) price.

In both cases, taxpayers must absorb the cost of the programs. They are told the programs are for the good of the nation. While such practices are outside the confines of a moral government, they find purpose in an immoral government. Politicians reap enormous benefits in terms of votes, and beneficiaries receive more than is their due. It is a cozy arrangement. It works because the favored beneficiaries, whether producers or consumers, are a focused group. Their votes flow to the politicians somewhat as a package. The taxpayers, however, find it hard to complain. They are dispersed and disorganized, and may be unaware of what is happening. What ire or awareness there is, does not trouble the politicians. They see votes coming their way, and that is all they care about.

A variation of the above is when the government decrees price caps on everything. It usually does this when general market prices are increasing rapidly in response to a previous and/or concurrent expansion of the government controlled fiat currency. In effect, the government tries to outlaw the consequences of its own actions. The idea that a complex market can operate on capped or fixed prices assumes the marketplace can operate as a static entity. But the marketplace is anything but static. It is strongly dynamic, especially in the face of rampant currency production. Changes in supply and demand for countless millions of items are taking place all the time. When the countless changes can find no expression in terms of increasing prices due to currency inflation, one by one the prices will be recognized as unrealistic. Profits plummet and the producers stop producing. Unemployment climbs. The government must then back down and remove the price caps or seize control of all industries.

In tumultuous times, large numbers of people will demand government-imposed price caps; but the consequences, alas, will never be to their liking. Price caps are a good example of the cure exacerbating the disease.

Just as the legendary sea nymphs lured, with their hauntingly beautiful calls, unsuspecting sailors onto the rocks and to their deaths, so does the siren call of price controls lure unsuspecting nations onto the rocks, there to lay them low.

 

Section 10. Government as the Insurer of Last Resort

Many people believe the government is a source of infinite wealth. They believe wealth flows from a spigot, and the government can turn the spigot on and off at will. When they request wealth from the government because of some need or calamitous event, they are merely asking for what they feel they deserve and what they have a right to expect. All the government has to do is to turn on the wealth spigot and give them what they want. This belief arises naturally when the government in question has had a longstanding and open-ended authority to print currency and issue bonds. It is as if the government can generate wealth without effort. It is, therefore, easy for people to believe it is entirely proper for government to come to the rescue in the case of dire needs or calamitous events.

People see government not only as the insurer of last resort; they see government as a free insurer. Over time, both private citizens and business entities find ways of making the maximum use of this free insurance. People and business institutions are able to turn away from responsibilities they would otherwise be forced to shoulder. Now the major banks can engage in speculative market activities and risky loans without having to worry about a run on their reserves. The government will always come to their rescue. Now farmers need not worry about buying crop insurance. Now communities may locate in flood plains without worrying about flood insurance. Now people may build their homes on the seashore without having to worry about storm insurance. Whenever there is a flood, tornado, hurricane, or earthquake, etc., the government will always be there to help.

People see the government as their benefactor and do not look beyond it. They do not worry about the issuance of bonds and the printing of new currency. They receive the help they need. The politicians who lead the way with the government support receive accolades from the grateful beneficiaries and will also receive their votes come the next election. However, the government’s ability to issue bonds and print currency grossly distorts the picture of what is happening.

Government has no wealth of its own. It is not a wealth-creating entity. No one should see government as a benefactor. Everyone must learn to look beyond the veil of government and see the real source of wealth. The only real source of government wealth is wealth it is able to extract from the general populace. Now the picture becomes clear. Those in distress want the government to confiscate wealth from the general population of taxpayers, and bestow the proceeds upon them so they may be relieved of their distress. But this poses a serious moral issue. Morality does not take a vacation when misfortune strikes. What makes people think they have a right to reach into someone else’s pocketbook, whether directly or indirectly through government, whatever the circumstances? Misfortune aside, is not this practice a clear example of theft? Is the word theft somehow cleansed of its opprobrious connotations simply because the government is the agent for the confiscation of wealth? Everyone must remain clearheaded when they view the actions of government. No institution stands above morality, nor are there any special situations that will exempt government from the rules of the Universal and Unifying Morality. There are only two words that are appropriate to describe the situation whereupon person “A,” whether distressed or not, interacts with politicians to forcefully confiscate wealth from person “B,” so person “A” and those in government may enjoy the benefits thereof. Those two words are conspiracy and theft.

Just as the legendary sea nymphs lured, with their hauntingly beautiful calls, unsuspecting sailors onto the rocks and to their deaths, so does the siren call of government as the insurer of last resort lure unsuspecting nations onto the rocks, there to lay them low.

 

Section 11. Living Beyond the Means

Living beyond the means is always a temptation for both individuals and nations. There are many ways for individuals to live beyond their means. Currency can be borrowed from friends or relatives, homes can be mortgaged, funds can be borrowed from banks and most alluring of all, in some societies credit cards can be easily obtained and used to accumulate debt. Time, however, will always work against those who live beyond their means. The day will surely arrive when creditors demand payment, and if the payments are not forthcoming, debt-ridden individuals will have their ill-gotten property taken from them. They will be forced into the embarrassment of bankruptcy. They may even lose their homes. Though the story ends sadly, it ends justly, usually within a brief timeframe, and with little consequence to others who are more frugal and responsible.

Unfortunately, in the case of nations, things are quite different. Most nations possess tools that will allow them to live beyond their means for many decades. The two most vital tools are the authority and ability to create paper currency without limit, and the authority and ability to accumulate debt without limit. When creditors are calling or payments come due, the government simply prints more currency or issues more debt to pay its obligations.

All governments have an inherent tendency to spend beyond their income, and if there are no moral, organizational, or constitutional restraints powerful enough to hold them in check, the vast majority of governments will opt to do it. The use of currency production and debt accumulation will prove irresistible. Voters and politicians will interact to build a system whereupon large numbers of people can enjoy the good life by employing the machinations of paper currency production and currency depreciation to surreptitiously steal wealth from the pockets, purses, banking and investment accounts of the general populace, and robbing future generations of their righteous expectations by imposing massive debt obligations upon them.

The support for today’s profligate spending has to come from somewhere. Outright taxation is too honest and direct, and would never find favor with the voters. However, the roundabout way of taxing via currency printing is not understood by most people, and when benefits are at risk, most people are willing to look askance at the debt they are bequeathing to their offspring. When government is given, or usurps, the authority to print currency and accumulate debt, moral behavior and fiscal responsibility are sent into exile. Godliness is nowhere to be seen.

A central government that enables itself and its citizenry to live beyond the means is engaged in deceit, fraud, theft, and delusion. Such a system may go on for decades, but will eventually come to grief as currency production and debt becomes so rampant and obvious that even the most naive will come to understand the nation’s financial system is doomed.

The situation is analogous to a construction crew building a skyscraper where sound leadership is lacking. There is no one to tell the construction crews when to stop adding floors. A point is reached where workers stop looking down. To look down is too frightening. Everyone develops myopic vision and can only look up. Everyone’s well-being depends on adding more and more floors. One floor will be funded by debt, the next by currency production, the next by debt, and the next by currency production once again. Surely the day will come when something at the bottom will give way.

The use of irredeemable fiat money is a feature of an out-of-control, omnipotent government that has abandoned the concept of government as a component of the division of labor. It is a feature of a government that has divorced itself from the citizenry to become a self-justified and self-sustaining institution. Irredeemable fiat currency production provides politicians with a means of buying their way into high seats of authority, election after election. Now government can extend its tentacles of authority in every direction. Now it can create social programs that will make citizens dependent upon government largess. Now it can build and maintain a large army to glorify its image and intimidate its neighbors.

However, the fact that irredeemable fiat currency can be created without limit is precisely what makes it a disastrous choice. Currency can fulfill its function well only as it remains scarce. As government makes fiat currency more plentiful, it undercuts the function of currency and destabilizes the price of everything that is bought and sold in terms of it. This process can continue for a long time but must eventually result in economic and social breakdown as the artificial money loses its usefulness and depleted tomorrows arrive on the scene.

 

Section 12. The Forced Use of Artificial and Dishonest Fiat Currency

Examined closely, it is seen that the forced use of artificial, dishonest, and irredeemable fiat currency through legal tender laws is deeply criminal. Citizens are forced to exchange goods and services that have intrinsic value for an exchange media that has no intrinsic value. Hence, all exchanges are coerced and fraudulent. They violate the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth as well as important tenets of the Universal and Unifying Morality. Governments that force their citizens to use an irredeemable paper currency capable of being printed in unlimited quantities are rogue governments no longer deserving of support. Such governments should be forcefully assailed until the situation is corrected.

 

Section 13. Printing Fiat Currency Does Not Create New Wealth

Irredeemable fiat currency is not the same thing as wealth. Fiat money does not equal wealth. Wealth does not flow from money printing presses. To say it does is tantamount to saying that homes, heating and cooling units, clean water, food, automobiles, and roadways, etc., can be printed; and, if that were true, it would be well understood by this time, and poverty would have long since disappeared from the face of the earth.

Irredeemable fiat currency represents wealth. The distinction is important. When government prints more paper currency, it is not printing more wealth. It is merely printing more of that which represents wealth. What are the ramifications?

 

Section 14. Fraud and Theft at the Currency Press

Intuitively, a newly printed, non-replacement unit of fiat currency is not the same thing as a unit of paper currency that has been worked for and saved. A unit of currency that has been worked for and saved embodies the effort that went into earning it. It represents a measure of hard work, whether physical or mental. It represents real and honest value. If the money presses were turned off and left off, existing paper currency units would eventually assume an honest and predictable representation of wealth and could be honestly and trustfully exchanged for all goods and services. Such an economy might thrive until the money presses were turned on again.

But what value is embodied in a non-replacement unit of fiat currency fresh off the printing press? Has it been worked for? Has it been saved? The answer, in each case, is no! The new unit of money represents no value whatsoever. It is simply a piece of fancy paper with fancy graphics printed on it. It is meant to deceive. Its only value is its intrinsic value, which is next to nothing. It would amount to the heat value derived from burning it in a campfire, or for someone to use as a wipe at the toilet.

How then, as the newly printed unit of currency is spent, is it able to represent value that it did not have previous to its spending? At one moment, it is a valueless piece of paper; and in the next moment, it may be exchanged for valuable goods and services. How can that happen? It can only happen because a measure of value has been hijacked and taken away from the value represented by previously existing currency units. Both fraud and theft have occurred. The spending party has obtained goods and services beyond their due. The spending party has obtained goods and services in exchange for something that had no value previous to the exchange.

The reference to currency rolling off the printing presses, it must be noted here, is mostly a figure of speech. In reality, most central governments do not print up large sums of paper currency. They merely make entries into the ledgers of their central banks and treasury departments, but the effect is the same. As new fiat currency is injected into the economy, a redistribution of wealth must take place. Wealth in real terms must flow out of previously existing paper currency, as well as all assets denominated in the given paper currency, into the newly created currency. Owners of the previously existing currency and owners of assets denominated in the given paper currency are thereby victimized. They are the victims of robbery as surely as if a deadly weapon is used in the process. This kind of theft is easy to commit because, in a given country, all money units look the same. Aside from appearing new (currency units printed to replace worn-out stock are also new) who can tell the difference between newly created currency and previously existing currency?

Can a unit of currency be exchanged honestly and trustfully, under a system where the government is printing currency at will? The answer is no! It cannot be exchanged honestly and trustfully because nobody can be sure of the value it represents today or will represent tomorrow. No one knows how much dilution has, or will, take place. All exchanges, therefore, become a gamble and if the currency production continues, the national economy will eventually lose its viability. Currency printing by the government is little different from currency counterfeiting by individuals. Both involve swindle. The only difference is one is legal, and the other is illegal.

Money must be honest and true to its purpose. It can perform its function well only as it remains scarce. The more economic calculation is based on a true understanding of the value of the exchange media and the state of the nation’s wealth, the better the economy will function to provide for the needs of all over the long term. Wealth cannot be created by such a simple means as printing currency. Paper currency represents wealth. It does not and cannot equal wealth.

 

Section 15. Fiat Currency Inflation

In contemporary times, pseudo economists and socialist politicians have largely succeeded in redefining the word inflation. Many decades ago, everyone understood the word inflation, in the economic sense, referred to the excessive production of paper currency along with the excessive issuance of credit by the nation’s central banking system. The word had opprobrious connotations, and for good reason. People of earlier ages, when printing presses capable of large scale currency production were first developed, were more familiar with what printing presses can do to a nation’s currency. But the pseudo economists and the socialist politicians wanted to use currency production as a means of promoting their social agendas and controlling interest rates. Before they could do that, they had to change the public perception of what the word inflation meant. Over a period of several decades, they succeeded famously.

Most people now accept the word inflation as meaning a general upward trend in prices. In most parts of the world the great masses, popular politicians, the most prominent of economists, and all of the mass media, now use the word inflation in that sense. The meaning of the word inflation has been changed from the fact of inflation, which is to say, an increase in the quantity of currency and credit, to one of inflation’s most visible consequences, which is to say, a general upward trend in prices. The consequences have been profound.

Nowadays, people speak of oil inflation, electricity inflation, health services inflation, educational services inflation, water inflation, building materials inflation, milk inflation, meat inflation, fresh produce inflation, and the inflation of a million and one other items. When people associate the word inflation with the increase in prices of a host of different goods and services, they enter into a world of confused thought. As they try to trace the cause of inflation, they are likely to blame it on a shortage of goods or the avarice of unscrupulous merchants. Politicians join in the chorus. They rail against inflation and promise to fight it with every ounce of strength they have. Anger is directed toward victims and away from the true culprit, which is the nation’s central bank. From the highest reaches of academia to the most humble wage earner, understanding is lost. There is a grand befuddlement.

Amazingly, even the government bureaucrats who are directly responsible for the currency inflation are caught up in the befuddlement and seem to have no understanding of the great harm they are doing when they join in the chorus for more spending and more currency production. They see no connection between their central bank’s issuance of new currency and the increased prices. They see only the immediate results of their actions, which are to their liking. They are able to provide their constituents with benefits they would not otherwise be able to provide, and curry votes they would not otherwise receive.

If people would only take the time to stand back and engage in a small amount of quiet thought, most would come to understand that a general increase in prices would not be possible without an increase in the quantity of currency and credit, which is inflation. The upward trend in prices is not happening because goods and services are becoming more valuable, it is happening because currency units are losing their value as the government, through its central bank, makes them more plentiful.

 

Section 16. Fiat Currency Inflation and Fractional Reserve Banking

Under a system of irredeemable fiat currency and a deficient regulatory environment, commercial banks are able to loan out multiples of what savers have deposited. Acting collectively, the banks effectively place all of their customer’s deposits into a reserve fund. If experience dictates that a ten percent reserve fund is sufficient to satisfy the bank’s need for cash and the needs of customers who want to make occasional withdrawals, that means the banks can loan out anything under nine parts for each one part held in reserve. If, for instance, private and business entities should deposit one million units of currency into commercial banks, the banks could, conceivably, loan out nine million units of currency credits. As the loans are repaid, the banks are enriched. Though fraught with trickery and deceit, it is a temptation that is hard for bankers to resist.

In addition to enriching themselves, the commercial banks have put themselves into the business of credit creation. The commercial banks have created up to nine million units of credit that did not exist before. In effect they print currency, just as central banks do. If a central bank exists that guarantees member banks reserve funds, then the commercial banking sector’s power to make loans and create credit is virtually without limit.

Fractional reserve banks are big players in the economic activity cycle. Small waves and undercurrents of instability are always operating throughout the full depth and breadth of the national economy. When government-sponsored central banks create new currency for political purposes, the new currency creates a wave of economic activity. In the process, the currency eventually finds its way into the commercial banking system.

Even small waves of economic activity will be exacerbated by a commercial banking system capable of creating large sums of new credit based upon a limited reserve fund. On the upswing of a wave, more funds will flow into the commercial banks. Several multiples of the deposited funds flow out of the bank and into the hands of borrowers to exacerbate the upward surge of economic activity. The wave becomes larger still. However, just as wealth cannot be printed, neither can it be created through the machinations of fractional reserve banking. Because the upsurge in economic activity is based on false information regarding the real-wealth state of the nation, the upsurge must come to an end.

The fraudulent nature of fractional reserve banking is most easily understood in terms of gold. If, for instance, savers should deposit one million units of gold into commercial banks, the banks could lawfully, under a ten percent reserve requirement, loan out approximately nine million units of gold. But where would the nine million units of gold come from. Only one million is held in reserve. Conceivably, the banks could loan out nine million paper claims to the gold held in reserve. In a fiat currency economy they deal with paper claims (credit) all the time. However, borrowers borrow only in order to spend. As the paper claims to gold are made use of, the banks would exhaust their reserve fund to redeem only the first million claims. At that point, the banks would have to close their doors, and the holders of the remaining eight million claims would be left out in the cold, as would all bank depositors and shareholders. Reality rules in a gold economy. By their very nature, fractional reserve banks are criminal institutions.

If the First Person Singular is interested in the maintenance of economic and price stability, she/he must work untiringly to have the kind of fractional-reserve banking that enables bankers to create vast amounts of new credit outlawed. Fractional-reserve banking is not only a major contributor to price instability; it introduces illusion into economic calculation and brings forth mal-investment of capital, mal-placement of labor, and a general diminution of structural economic efficiency. Though bankers may scream in protest, their motives are selfish. They make their fractional-reserve profits by trickery and deceit, and the credit they create is destructive of the social well-being.

 

Section 17. The Monetary Inflation Time of Illusion, and the Economic Activity Cycle

When the government creates more paper currency, it is not creating more wealth. It is merely creating more of that which represents wealth. Though wealth does not flow from currency printing presses, the illusion of wealth does. Interest rates are held low through connivance rather than hard work and saving. The surge in economic activity is, therefore, based on fantasy and false information. The easy availability of currency has caused people to believe their wealth, as well as the nation’s wealth, is greater than it really is. The happy times are based on the illusion of wealth brought about by currency and credit expansion and are characterized by inappropriate purchases, mal-investment and mal-placement of labor.

In the future, all of the errors will have to be corrected, for the prosperity is an exaggerated and artificial prosperity that the future will not support. Nonetheless, everyone enjoys the spending spree. False economic data leads everyone astray. People live only for the present and do not worry about the day when reality will reassert itself. Honest economic calculation is nowhere to be seen.

As the new currency enters into circulation, the wealth represented by previously existing money must enter into a state of dilution. Slowly but surely, wealth is redistributed away from the old currency and toward the new currency. What makes the printing of money so attractive to politicians and citizens alike is that the redistribution of wealth does not occur at the moment the newly created money is exchanged for products or services. Unless it is anticipated, which is usually not the case, the redistribution of wealth happens only slowly over time. For a period of time, therefore, which may extend for many months or even years, it is as though new wealth has been added to the economy.

The increased economic activity and the ramifications that ensue, between the time the new paper currency is introduced into the economy and the time the new currency is fully integrated into the economy in terms of price and interest rate adjustments, may be called the Monetary Inflation Time of Illusion. The allure of the Monetary Inflation Time of Illusion is, without a doubt, very powerful to politicians and citizens alike, for it encourages everyone to live beyond their means.

Most people do not see their apparent increase in wealth as being illusory or temporary. Early in the time of illusion, more people can afford to buy homes they could not previously afford. More people can afford to buy automobiles they could not previously afford. More people can afford to travel to places they could only dream of traveling to before. More people can afford to dine in restaurants and attend plays and concerts. To the people concerned, these things are not illusions. They are real! Most people find more joy in their lives and feel they are living in good times. Egos are also inflated.

The apparent increase in wealth, however, is not real. The new monetary issuance has lulled the population into a state of monetary intoxication and has caused them to spend beyond their means. While it may be true the additional large homes, productive resources, additional infrastructure, and new social programs generated by the new currency, constitute an apparent increase in capital and an apparently improved state of well-being, it is capital of the wrong kind and an improved state of well-being that can only be temporary. As the new currency is integrated into the economy and time works its will, it will be discovered that the large homes, additional productive resources, infrastructure, and new social programs are unaffordable and must be downsized or abandoned.

The Monetary Inflation Time of Illusion is only a temporary phenomenon. The euphoria cannot last. The marketplace has a way of recognizing and adjusting to the increased quantity of currency. When entrepreneurs see a surge in their business, they can react in several ways. Self-employed individuals may bring in one or more partners and expand their offices or workshops. Manufacturers can utilize their plant, office space, and production equipment more effectively by hiring additional workers and running a second or third shift. They might even expand their plant and office space and buy addition production equipment.

An important option all commercial interests retain is to increase the price of their goods and services, such that the new and higher price will partially or wholly offset the increased demands of their customers. In normal times they would not be able to increase their prices without seeing a commensurate decline in sales. However, in times of paper currency inflation, they can demand and receive the higher prices without a decline in sales. As a result, all prices, including the price of labor, generally trend upward. Over time, as the new currency is slowly assimilated into the economic structure, the positive effects of the new currency will turn negative. Now the consequences of the higher prices must be dealt with.

The higher prices stun consumers. They discover they are not as wealthy as they previously thought. They cut back on their spending, withdraw bank deposits, and concentrate on paying off their debts. The economy goes into disarray. Entrepreneurs also, now see the previous expansion as a mistake. Whereas previously, adjustments were made in the positive direction, now adjustments must be made in the negative direction. Entrepreneurs must cut back production and lay off workers.

As in the previous section, the new currency creates an effect similar to a wave on the ocean. First there is an upside, and then there is a downside. The upside is the euphoria everyone feels while the illusion effect is in place. There is more spending, and there are more and better jobs. Everyone is happy.

At the peak of the wave, however, the higher prices force people to confront the fact that they are not as wealthy as they once thought. The higher prices slow the economy, neutralize the euphoria everyone has felt, and slowly turns the euphoria into anxiety. The downside of the wave commences when people are forced to deal with the higher prices. People discover they have spent, built, and hired, beyond their means.

On the down side of the wave, everything works in reverse. Bank depositors have need of their funds and withdraw on a large scale. Many borrowers are unable to make payments on what they owe. Reserve funds are quickly depleted leaving the banks without operating capital. All lending ceases as banks struggle to maintain their solvency. Unless the central bank steps in with more currency creation, many banks will sink beneath the surface and take the hard-earned savings of many trusting savers and investors with them.

This cycle may take many years to unfold, and can be repeated many times. People generally understand that so-called “easy money” can bring prosperity, but are too unschooled to associate the ensuing economic contraction with a currency inflation that may have occurred many months or years earlier. The economic contraction is explained in many popular ways. Many people blame the greedy merchants for increasing their prices. The merchants are accused of price-gouging and of taking advantage of hapless customers. Bankers who must restrict their loans are accused of being money hungry and uncaring. Mass media luminaries always tout shortages as being the cause of higher prices. They never find the courage to explain to listeners that the higher prices are the result of a reduced purchasing power of the national currency. People support the inflationist politicians with their votes, but do not blame them or their own avarice for the economic downturn that must follow every inflation-induced expansion.

Though it may sound like a contradiction, the boom phase of the cycle is the error phase of the cycle. That is when people are tricked into believing the national and individual wealth is greater than it really is, and they act and spend accordingly. The depression phase is the necessary correction phase. That is when people discover they, as well as their nation, are not as wealthy as they once thought. Now they must learn to act and spend within the confines of a new reality.

As the above cycle is repeated time and again, long-term errors accumulate and become increasingly difficult to overcome with more currency printing. With each cycle, a measure of wealth is consumed and rendered unavailable for future use. As the quantity of fiat currency increases, the quantity of wealth in real terms decreases. The governing bureaucrats discover they must run the currency presses faster and faster to have the same effect.

Eventually, even the most ignorant and naive of citizens realize what is happening. They realize their currency is depreciating in value and will continue to depreciate. People rush to move their wealth into more tangible and trustworthy assets. As more people try to get rid of their rapidly depreciating currency, it depreciates even more rapidly and may become valueless as the market is flooded with the now-hated currency. Economic calculation ceases to be of any benefit. Commerce grinds to a halt for lack of a useful medium of exchange and a viable price edifice, and the nation will fall into a state of chaos and despair.

The proponents of irredeemable fiat currency believe it is possible to forever keep the economy in the happy zone, which is to say the Monetary Inflation Time of Illusion, but it is an impossible task. Newly created currency serves to sunder reality from economic calculation, and must produce business errors and difficulties over time, though few people will understand the cause and effect relationship.

 

Section 18. Fiat Currency Inflation, Surreptitious Debt Depreciation, and the Expropriation of Savings

Over time, an undue increase in the supply of currency and credit, usually involving an artificial lowering of interest rates, will result in a general increase in market prices for all goods and services. This is not to say that all prices will go up at the same time, the same rate, or to the same degree. Due to market dynamics, some prices will increase sharply and quickly, while others may go up only slowly. A small number may not go up at all or may even decline. The general trend in prices, however, will be in the upward direction. Given fiat currency inflation, prices generally do not go up because the various goods and services available in the marketplace are becoming more valuable; prices go up because the paper currency used to purchase the goods is becoming less valuable. As the quantity of currency is increased, the marketplace, over time, will assign a lesser value to each unit of currency. Over time, it will take more money to buy things. If, for instance, there is an approximate five percent increase in prices over a period of one year, it is most likely because, over the same time frame, each unit of money has lost approximately five percent of the value it previously represented.

When a nation is burdened with substantial amount of private, corporate, and government debt and is engaging in currency inflation, the consequences can be horrendous for both savers and creditors. When the national currency is being debased, which is to say, when the value represented by each unit of currency is in a state of decline, a commensurate portion of the value of private, corporate, and government debt also vanishes into thin air. If, for instance, as in the previous paragraph, each unit of currency has lost five percent of the value it previously represented, it means that all bonds denominated in the paper currency have also lost the same five percent of the value they represented. In real value terms, five percent of the value represented by the private, corporate, and government bonds has simply vanished. Over a period of a half-century or three-quarters of a century of currency inflation, well-nigh one hundred percent of the value the bonds represented at the beginning of the currency inflation may be eradicated.

The same situation holds true for small savers who have saving accounts at their local bank. Surreptitiously, like a thief in the night, government slowly expropriates wealth in real terms from their hard-earned savings. When savers have need of their money, they find it has a lower purchasing power than it did when they trustfully placed it in the bank for safekeeping. It is not difficult to see that a crime is being perpetrated. Creditors and savers are having a portion, and over time it can be a large portion, of their wealth stolen from them.

Granted that, in terms of numbers of monetary units represented by each bond or held in each savings account, nothing is apparently amiss. Each bond is still denominated by the same number of monetary units, and each savings account still has the same number of monetary units in it. Indeed interest will add to the total. That is what makes the process so deceptive. It is the value of the monetary units that is being debased.

It is not that the deception is hidden from view. People have but to open their eyes to it. When government debt becomes burdensome, and government does not want to consider debt retirement through honest payment, it can reduce its debt in real value terms through fiat currency inflation. To the degree the currency is debased, value in real terms flows, unseen, out of every government instrument of debt, and the government’s debt burden is thereby reduced.

Rogue and immoral leaders have made government the agent for the depreciation of its own bonds. They have rendered all of the government bonds fraudulent. They have stolen wealth in real terms from every savings account. They cheat the very people who stand between the central government and its own bankruptcy. They have deceived the public and have made fraud a policy of government. They have turned the central government into a criminal institution. Aside from method, there is no essential difference between the government stealing from victims via currency depreciation, and thugs in the night who forcibly relieve their victims of a portion of their wealth. Though the methods and perpetrators are different, the crime is the same.

All of the important governments of the world engage in the above practice. Yet, hardly a whimper of protest is heard. Either people are too unschooled to understand what is happening, they are state worshipers who believe their government is above morality, they are afraid to be among the first to cry out in protest, or, as is probably the case, they recoil from the very painful adjustment the nation will have to endure when the central government is forced to stop printing irredeemable fiat currency. Such fear is understandable but vain. The sooner the necessary corrections are made, the better the chances are that the currency can be saved. If nothing is done, a time will surely come when the debt is so great it becomes unsustainable even with the most skillful use of skullduggery and machination. The money presses will run so wildly that even the most naive of citizens will understand the national paper currency and everything denominated in it must be abandoned as a store of value. The economic structure will then come crashing down. Paper denominated wealth will vanish and the nation will descend into economic and social chaos.

In banking, there is a tacit and solemn understanding on the part of borrowers that what is borrowed will be paid back in full along with whatever interest is due. It is one of the things that keep the market economy running smoothly. There is no reason to exclude indebted governments from this assumption of honesty. People working in government have the same obligation to be honest as does any borrower. Government sets at the top of a nation’s economic and moral hierarchy. It sets the standard of behavior for everything below it.

When a government prints currency to the degree it debases the nation’s currency and debt, it is violating one of the most basic tenets of moral behavior—the tacit pledge that what is borrowed will be paid back in full, along with interest. It is engaging in racketeering and exemplifying a behavioral standard that is at the level of mobsters and thugs.

An honest and moral central government will never engage in currency, bond, and savings debasement. Currency, bond, and savings debasement is a policy set deep within the realm of omnipotent and criminal government.

 

Section 19. The Bequeathing of Debt to Future Generations

Short of financial breakdown, there is no intrinsic limit to the amount of currency an omnipotent government can print and offer to the loan market. Also, short of financial breakdown, there is no intrinsic limit on the amount of debt that can be accumulated and continuously rolled over by individuals, business entities, or the government itself. As government debt is carried forward, it is increasingly placed upon the shoulders of future generations. It is an easy thing to do, since the victims of this variation of theft are unable to object to it.

A debt structure that is continually rolled over as it is increased is one of the hallmarks of a perverted and criminal government as well as a corrupted and intellectually lazy citizenry. Such a government is unworthy of anyone’s respect or support. The people at the top should be brought down and held to account for their criminal acts. The citizens of a nation that lives on credit and leaves payment for future generations should bow their heads in shame. What dastardly deed exceeds stealing from one’s own progeny? Surely, when the children grow up and discover they have been burdened with unpayable debt and a doomed economy, they will revolt, and justly so. In the throes of hardship, even the most forgiving will find it difficult to think kindly of their corrupt and selfish forebears.

 

Section 20. Fiat Currency Inflation and the Manipulation of Interest Rates

In an economy based on reality, honesty, and sound money, the only wealth available to the loan market is wealth that has been saved by individuals or business entities and made available to borrowers. Over time, would-be savers and would-be borrowers reach an agreement that at a certain interest rate, a certain amount of wealth will be made available to the loan market. Higher interest rates will generally call forth an increased response from savers, but a lower response from borrowers, while lower interest rates will generally call forth a decreased response from savers, but an increased response from borrowers. At the agreed upon interest rate, supply and demand find unity.

Interest rates must also be tailored to specific cases. Such things as immediate risk, future uncertainty, and the timeframe of the loan will also be determining factors. The practice of continuously rolling over debt is scorned by creditors and penalized by the imposition of higher interest rates on any new loans. It is an indication debtors are unable or unwilling to pay off their loans as promised. In an honest economy, money available to the loan market is always finite, discipline is intense, and the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth prevail. Everyone understands that funds borrowed must be paid back, along with interest and within the allotted time frame. Violators, including governments, are quickly weeded out to make room for honest borrowers. Future generations are not unduly burdened with debt.

However, socialist politicians and large numbers of socially inclined citizens are always impatient with interest rates that are determined solely by savers and borrowers. They reason that if interest rates were lower, more people would be able to borrow money to purchase homes, household goods, clothes, and automobiles, etc. The lower interest rates would produce a surge in economic activity as producers respond to the increased demands for goods and services. More people would be put to work, and everyone would benefit. In short, high interest rates stand in the way of prosperity, while low interest rates open the door to prosperity.

However, if interest rates were simply lowered by government fiat, economic reality would quickly assert itself. Some savers would be encouraged to withdraw their money from the loan market and invest it elsewhere, with the result that there would be less money, not more, available to those who would borrow. In another approach, government could tax money from the citizenry and inject it into the loan market. But politicians advocating such an idea would quickly feel the wrath of their constituents.

Politicians do not enjoy having their plans and ambitions thwarted by unappreciative taxpayers. The unscrupulous leaders, therefore, are constantly on the alert for ways and means whereby they can extract wealth from the citizenry without eliciting organized or highly visible resistance. One way open to them is to claim and utilize the authority to print paper currency without constraints. By printing additional paper currency, the politicians gain in two ways—one direct and the other indirect. Directly, they simply use the new currency to pay for government operations, including operations that will benefit their own political ambitions. In a more indirect fashion, the new currency will appear in the banking system as though it represented additional savings, and will have the effect of pushing interest rates lower than they would otherwise be.

It is a scenario most politicians find irresistible, especially when times are hard, and many people are unemployed and in a state of despair. When interest rates are held artificially low via currency production, economic activity increases to the pleasure of all. Politicians boast they have created jobs and have put the economy of the nation on a sound footing.

More currency also flows into the government coffers in the form of taxes. Government leaders have what they are looking for, more funds to fuel their political ambitions, with an absence of large scale taxpayer resistance. Alas, the good times cannot last. Manipulated interest rates are always part of a larger fiat currency economic structure. Such structures will always lead nations into downward spirals.

There is a great contradiction at work with the socialist maxim that interest rates should be held artificially low to fuel a more vigorous economy. The socialist politicians believe they are helping people and business entities by providing them with easy credit. After all, the easy credit allows more people to enjoy the essentials of life, and businesses to more easily expand their operations. However, the artificially low interest rates penalize savers and destroys the incentive to save. Without an adequate reward for saving, many people, especially the elderly, lose the ability to take care of themselves, and business directors watch with dismay as their reserve funds, out of which they must pay their employees and fund their product development programs, etc., slowly wither away. Without a reward for saving, wealth must be consumed to cover day-to-day expenses. An economy that does not adequately reward savers is an economy headed toward bankruptcy.

 

Section 21. Fiat Currency Inflation and the Corruption of Economic Calculation

Meaningful and honest economic calculation is the heartbeat of every modern and workable economy capable of bringing prosperity to a hardworking populace. With honest economic calculation, every item of produce and every service is, over time, assigned a narrow range of prices. The prices reflect both the desirability of the item or service in question, and the degree of difficulty in making the item or service available in the marketplace. Prices are, therefore, economically meaningful. Businessmen and women can use economic calculation to determine project feasibility and profit and loss. Consumers know what to expect when they have need of something. They know what they can afford and what they cannot afford. Everything makes economic sense, and the system becomes very efficient. Scarce resources are put to their best possible use and economic reality prevails, though it may not always be to everyone’s liking.

The free marketplace also calls forth consistent and sound money that is not manipulated behind the scenes. Just as buyers of goods and services want to know the goods and services they are buying are of good quality and honestly offered, so do the sellers of the goods and services want to know the money they are, in a sense buying, is of the highest quality and is similarly offered. To be sure, there is no such thing as perfect money, but the unhampered marketplace will always call forth the best money that can be found. Invariably, it will choose gold.

However, as a central government becomes more socialistic and dictatorial, it leaves honesty and gold behind. The idea of government as a component of the division of labor is cast aside and forgotten. The use of gold as money is outlawed, and indeed the ownership of gold may be outlawed. Fiat currency is foisted upon the public, and government expenditures not covered by taxation are paid for through currency printing and the issuance of debt. Economic reality is abandoned and economic fantasy is embraced.

A central bank is assigned the task of keeping interest rates artificially low, so both individuals and business owners are more easily able to obtain loans. Less of the currency available on the loan market is money someone has worked for and saved, and more of it is currency fresh off the printing presses. Interest rates are lowered as the new currency is injected into the banking system, the same as would happen if there were an increase in savings.

The difference between the old money and the new money is not visible to the public. No one is able to tell the difference between a unit of currency that has been worked for and saved, and a newly printed unit of currency. It looks the same and spends the same. Indeed, most people may remain completely unaware of any increase in the currency supply. The workings of government, they feel, are beyond them, and they make no effort to understand what is happening to their currency.

More people are able to borrow currency to make initial payments on homes and automobiles. People start buying more of everything. Commercial interests notice the increased demand for goods and services. New factories are constructed, old factories are enlarged and modernized, and additional workers are hired to staff them. The unemployed find work while others enjoy pay increases. They, in turn, spend to add to the good times. The effects reverberate throughout the economy. The easy availability of credit pushes economic activity to a height it would not have otherwise achieved. The newly printed currency obscures reality and leaves everyone giddy.

Artificially low interest rates encourage individuals and businesses to accumulate debt they would not otherwise dream of accumulating. Home construction booms and auto plants hum with activity. As economic activity increases, additional tax money flows into government coffers at all levels. Cities are able to build beautiful new sports stadiums and grand promenades. States and provinces build beautiful new highway systems. Everyone enjoys the sense of additional wealth.

The increased economic activity is also a boon to politicians seeking voter approval. The politicians say they have “created jobs” and are “on the side of the common working people.” Politicians are able to expand their power and offer more benefits to voters in order to secure the voter’s approval at the next election. The luminaries are applauded wherever they appear. Everyone is anxious to shake their hands and pat them on the back. The new money puts smiles on the faces of citizens and politicians alike.

The economic boom, however, is an artificially induced boom fueled by printing press currency and debt. Prosperity is being extracted from the future in order that it may be enjoyed today. Economic decisions are based on the illusion of wealth rather than the fact of wealth. The new money has falsified economic calculation and induced error into all of business activity. The errors, however, are in the direction of increased economic activity. Everyone is happy. The small number of detractors are not listened to. Few people are aware that, in the future, all of the errors will have to be corrected because the wealth needed to support them has been consumed.

 

Section 22. Fiat Currency Inflation and the Consumption of Wealth

Whenever an individual with limited wealth goes on an inappropriate spending spree, it must always be the case that he or she will be living less securely after the spending spree. Debts have been incurred that will be difficult if not impossible to pay off, and goods have been acquired that are inappropriate given the individual’s wealth status.

At the collective level, things are no different. During the correction phase of the cycle, it is recognized that thousands of homes have been built that cannot be paid for or maintained; all manner of goods have been produced that cannot be sold at a profit, production facilities and retail outlets have been built or expanded beyond what is needed, tools and equipment have been purchased beyond what is needed, and employees have been hired beyond the numbers that are needed looking forward.

At the central government level, the armed forces and government bureaucracies have been unduly expanded, and new social programs instituted that the government will be unable to pay for in the future. In other words, wealth, time, and effort have been squandered.

While it may be true that a measure of infrastructure wealth is created during the boom phase of the cycle, in terms of useful buildings and roadways, etc., it is not enough to make up for the overall losses. Once the spending binge is over and time has had the opportunity to bring reality back into the economic picture, everyone will discover that they are poorer than they were before. The issuance of new currency has brought about capital and savings consumption.

A long succession of inflation-induced economic activity cycles will exact a terrible toll of wealth consumption on the strongest of economies, and will eventually lay low nations that cannot resist this destructive and immoral policy. To the degree the response to the new currency has been inappropriate, wealth is lost. Individuals, businesses, and governments have engaged in the wrong kind of economic activity. They have been led astray. They have wasted their wealth, time, and effort. All are poorer than they were before. When the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth are ignored and the Universal and Unifying Morality is cast aside, the consequences must be suffered.

 

Section 23. Beneficiaries and Victims of Fiat Currency Inflation

There are four main groups of beneficiaries of fiat currency inflation. The first group consists of the politicians and their lackeys, who are responsible for the inflation. They gain favor in the eyes of the voters. They see nothing but smiling faces at their gatherings. They win elections. Their egos are inflated by their popularity, and they see themselves as great leaders and great thinkers.

The second group consists of those who come into possession of the new currency first. They are able to spend the new currency before the general increase in prices due to currency depreciation is seriously felt. They include government employees, the military, government contractors, bankers, and all who borrow from the commercial banks during the early phase of the inflation.

The third group consists of citizens who receive various benefits as the result of the currency printing. Farmers receive their price supports and subsidized crop insurance, new infrastructure is funded putting more people to work, and the elderly, disabled, and dependent enjoy additional support. Even those in the workforce are relieved of many of the burdens that would otherwise fall to them and are able to enjoy living beyond their means. They see their parents cared for when the parents achieve old age, and look forward to enjoying the same government largess when they join the ranks of the elderly. They see their children provided with free schooling and medical care. They may enjoy benefits directly as when they lose their jobs or are otherwise unable to provide for either themselves or their dependents. Over time, large numbers of elderly and disabled people become partially or wholly dependent on the apparent wealth created by currency and credit-creating banking institutions.

The fourth group consists of all debtors. Over time, they are able to pay their debts with currency units that are not worth as much as the currency units they borrowed; essentially, they are able to cheat their creditors. A principal beneficiary of the fourth group is often the government itself, which is able to surreptitiously divest itself of a portion of its indebtedness as value, in real terms, flows out of all previously existing currency and instruments of debt. Indeed, the diminution of government debt in real value terms is often a principle factor driving the currency production process.

Who are the victims of the inflation madness? Again, there are four main groups. The first group consists of politicians who are unsuccessful in gaining positions of leadership. They are the true leaders who would put the nation on a moral, straight-and-narrow course. They are the true leaders who would stop the currency printing and establish a schedule of debt repayment that would be faithfully adhered to. They are the true leaders who would demand a balanced budget and a pay-as-you-enjoy system of benefits. They are the politicians who would truly lead rather than simply pander to the larcenous and utopian whims of the ignorant and corrupt masses.

They are the potential leaders, as well as thoughtful citizens, who languish in frustration as they watch their nation traveling a road leading to certain breakdown and turmoil. Indeed, the nation victimizes itself as it turns away from its most able leaders.

The second group of victims consists of those who come into possession of the new currency last, when it is fully depreciated in terms of higher prices. They are the retirees, the poor, and all others who live on fixed incomes. They may receive small increases to make up for the loss in value of their currency, but it will never be enough to fully compensate them for their losses. They see prices going up all around them and realize they are becoming poorer. Some will lose the means of supporting themselves as they see food, clothing, housing, and medications become unaffordable.

The third group of victims consists of the working taxpayers. They are forced, through taxes, to support their currency printing and bloated government, even as they see their own security becoming more precarious because of across-the-board price increases, a low return on their savings, and the depreciation of their fiat currency denominated assets.

The fourth group of victims, consisting of creditors and savers, lose in two ways. Every bond holder, including government bond holders, every business entity with a reserve fund, everyone with a savings account, everyone who has an insurance policy, and everyone who is in possession of a substantial amount of cash are victimized as currency depreciation causes a portion of their wealth to vanish into thin air. In addition, they are robbed of their just due as creditors and savers, by interest rates held artificially low by government machinations.

Most people build up a savings fund to support themselves in their advanced years. They do not want to become a burden to their children or to society. At least partially, they count on interest income from their savings to help them remain independent and self-supporting. When interest rates are held artificially low for political purposes, the effect can be devastating to many of the elderly. A measure of security is stolen from them at the very time of life when security is most dearly valued.

 

Section 24. The Poisonous Allure of Fiat Currency Inflation

When a nation is caught in the throes of the correction phase of the boom and bust cycle, the political leadership is subjected to enormous social pressures to do something about it. Citizens are used to viewing government as the caretaker of the economy and the provider of social benefits. They naturally assume it is the responsibility of government to find a way of restoring the nation to the state of prosperity that existed previous to the economic downturn. Politicians are frightened by the bitter complaints of the citizenry, by mass media attacks, and by what they see happening to the nation they are charged with leading. Their egos suffer. Whenever they face the public or news media, they feel belittled and embarrassed by the turn of events and desperately attempt to assure the citizenry that things are not as bad as they seem. In their private moments, the politicians know they must do something, no matter what it is. Lacking an understanding of the true nature of the problem they are confronting, the only avenue that seems open to them is to attempt to “restart” the economy with what they call “stimulus” spending packages.

Since the politicians are schooled in false economic philosophies and are probably unaware of the true economics, they trace the problem to related symptoms and are unable to follow the problem to its true origins. Their thinking is crooked. They operate in world of ill-founded statistics and transient details. They are dedicated to artificiality. They believe the economy can be “kick-started” or “stimulated,” or the “economic pump can be primed,” so once again, the economy will start to hum and the nation will be returned to a state of prosperity. All such stratagems, of course, are fueled by additional currency printing, additional debt accumulation, and artificially low interest rates, the very things that brought about the economic downturn.

The politicians and citizens alike do not realize that the economic downturn must be traced back to the previous time of prosperity, which was a fictional and exaggerated prosperity due to the currency printing, debt accumulation, and artificially low interest rates of previous months and years. Their constricted thought and devotion to the state does not allow them to understand the false information and economic intoxication provided by the earlier stimuli made the downturn inevitable. They also fail to see that the “stimulus” spending packages, given the way they are financed, are mere extensions of the national living beyond the means addiction, and only add to the artificial and exaggerated prosperity that is the source of the problem in the first place. All the stimulus spending can do is prolong the downturn, or, with a little luck, start the destructive and madcap cycle all over again. At some point, however, the currency printing, debt accumulation, and artificially low interest rates will be to no avail. Citizens will lose faith in the national currency. As they seek to rid themselves of it, it will lose value even more rapidly. Economic activity and the social order will break down. Water, natural gas, oil, and electricity will stop flowing into homes and workplaces. Grocery stores will be looted to the walls, and gangs of thugs will roam the streets. Millions may die as a consequence. Desperation will be everywhere, and it will be amply deserved.

The lack of sufficient wealth, a constant feature of life, will always be seen as a shortage of money. The more government officials satisfy the public’s clamor for more fiat currency, the more wealth in real terms is consumed. As additional wealth in real terms is consumed, it shows up as an ever-increasing shortage of money. As time passes, the currency printing presses have to run faster and faster to prevent an economic implosion. There can be no victory in such an insane struggle. The day of reckoning can be postponed by the issuance of additional currency and the accumulation of additional debt, but never prevented. Rather than thinking in terms of a shortage of money, citizens and government officials alike should be thinking in terms of overspending and over-committing in relation to their own and the nation’s true state of wealth.

Fiat currency production, whether by printing presses or more simple electronic ledger entries, must never be used to fund government operations, monetize debt, finance trade deficits, finance wars, bail out banks, cover bad debts, artificially reduce interest rates, counter the destruction caused by natural or social calamities, or to answer the ever-present public clamor for more welfare services.

Wealth does not flow from the currency printing presses, and no amount of wishful thinking will change that fact. Real wealth cannot be conjured up by such a simple and inexpensive trick. Real wealth is created by hard work, frugal living, and saving. Any amount of currency is adequate as long as denominations are such that the economy can function at all levels. Though the quantity of wealth may change, the quantity of money need not change. In order for money to best perform its function, it must always remain scarce. The Providential Laws of Reality and Truth and the Universal and Unifying Morality must dominate.

 

Section 25. Fiat Currency Inflation and War

A political, monarchic, or religious luminary presiding over a national economy based on gold as money, and where the legal system and structure of government prohibits the printing of fiat currency and the accumulation of debt, would have great difficulty leading her or his nation into a state of war. The full cost of fielding and sustaining an army, navy, and air force, would immediately fall to the citizenry. The government would be obliged to sharply increase, via taxes, the wealth flowing into its coffers. Sacrifices at the front would be systematically matched by sacrifices at home. The department charged with tax enforcement and collection would thrive, but even so, would be hard pressed to enforce compliance. It would be one trick for the politicians to persuade the citizenry that it is necessary to enter into a state of war, but quite another to persuade them that the war must be sustained for a long period of time.

With governments unable to print currency or accumulate debt, the full cost of warring would have to come directly out of the pockets of the citizenry, day after day, week after week, month after month, and year after year. Many citizens would be impoverished as a consequence, and many others would see their comforts and security sharply curtailed. Under the scrutiny of such an honest and direct cost appraisal, the industry of war would never receive the support it needs to thrive, save if it had to be engaged in for defensive purposes. There is good reason to believe that if the important nations of the world were on a full gold standard, the massive protracted wars that have for so long stained the pages of human history would no longer occur.

In contemporary times, wars waged by nations are financed by paper currency inflation and by deferring costs into the future via debt. Wealth is surreptitiously stolen from every saver by currency depreciation, and future generations are deprived of their just due, so the industry of property destruction and human slaughter can thrive.

Those who prefer peace over war, life over death, security over suffering, and prosperity over destitution must never allow their government to engage in fiat currency production or to accumulate debt. Gold is the money of honest, hardworking, peace-loving citizens. Irredeemable fiat currency is the money of scoundrels, thieves, and warmongers.

Just as the legendary sea nymphs of old lured, with their hauntingly beautiful calls, unsuspecting sailors onto the rocks and to their deaths, so does the siren call of living beyond the means lure unsuspecting nations onto the rocks, there to lay them low.

 

Back to Top

 

 

****

 

 

Chapter Five

Revelations

 

Section 1. Introduction

To understand or judge any government, one must have in mind a social, economic, and political reference frame that rests on bedrock, and an image of government that is as morally and intellectually foolproof as the human mind can make it. This chapter will seek to satisfy those requirements. It will teach that government must be viewed from numerous directions and with a high level of suspicion, so when it attempts to advance beyond its prescribed limits, the move will not go unnoticed and unopposed. Aggressive and persistent probing for true information is necessary, and vigilance must be kept at a high level.

 

Section 2. The Social, Economic, and Political (SEP) Spectrum

The following image will help thoughtful citizens understand the journey from freedom to despotism and from limited government to omnipotent government. The SEP Spectrum is a simple construct that is easy to remember and use. It will sweep away a great quantity of confused and indoctrinated thinking and bring a welcome clarity to economic and political thought and discourse.

 

 

It is helpful to divide the spectrum into three vertical and equal parts, with the central part representing an area of transition. All central governments will fall somewhere within the above spectrum.

It is impossible to place a central government at a precise point on the spectrum. The most important structural elements and policies of the government in question must be examined, assigned a degree of importance, and placed at an appropriate point on the spectrum. After examining and placing several of the most important structural elements, as well as important social, monetary, and foreign policies on the spectrum, citizens will have a good idea of where their government is situated. It should be kept in mind that only one or two structural elements or policies of great importance, located deep into the area of omnipotent government, may be enough to bring a society to grief.

In the top third of the spectrum, people enjoy a great deal of freedom. Private property is respected and the means of production is in private hands. Gold, with the best historical reputation for honesty and dependability, is used as money. Through countless acts of argument and accommodation, and the slow but steady dissemination of the resultant information, the price of labor and other commodities is determined, as well as the price of every unit of produce and service. Interest rates are determined by a meeting of minds between those who would save and those who would borrow. A highly complex and intricate price edifice emerges over time making economic calculation possible. Through economic calculation, business managers become proficient in determining whether projects are feasible or not feasible, and also how to use scarce resources in the best possible way. Reality, truth, and the Universal and Unifying Morality are observed. The marketplace and business enterprises flourish. Wealth spreads throughout the society, as more people are able to find jobs and purchase the goods produced.

Generally speaking, societies organized within the top third of the spectrum will prosper. Assuming the land and waters are not ravaged, and overpopulation is not an acute problem, people who educate themselves, work hard, and do not take backward steps, will do well.

Some people may rise to high positions of process ownership and become very wealthy, but they do not lock their wealth in a closet. They invest it in productive assets to expand output and put more people to work. They fund hospitals, the arts, and other worthy causes. Their wealth is well used for the benefit of society. The wealthy remain captains of industry only as long as they continue to invest in ways that best serve the interests of the great masses. As they make mistakes, their wealth will be reduced and may even disappear.

Economic calculation is healthy and can do its best work in the upper third of the spectrum. It becomes increasingly corrupted and less useful as excessive government manipulation of interest rates and prices, and the use of a fiat and dishonest currency drag it down into the lower third of the spectrum. There is nothing available in the lower third of the SEP Spectrum that will help the national economy achieve a high level of productive efficiency. Not even the most skillfully written, well-intended, and forceful dictates can replicate the treasure trove of information contained in a freely evolved price edifice.

Nations located in the central area are usually on their way down to the lower part of the spectrum. Fiat currency is the monetary standard. There is slow to rapid currency production and debt accumulation. Prices adjust to the currency printing and debt accumulation. Economic calculation is under stress, and errors in economic judgment are wide spread. Wealth in real terms is slowly consumed. Socialism becomes entrenched and government bureaucracy thrives. Welfare states may thrive for many decades in the central third of the spectrum, but must eventually descend into the lower third as large-scale money production, debt accumulation, and dictatorial means are resorted to in attempts to keep the failing system from collapsing.

For governments moving upward, usually from a state of economic collapse or near collapse, the central area is even less stable. Fiat currency is being abandoned for gold or gold equivalent money. There is a great deal of suffering and turmoil. The central area must be transitioned quickly so moral government and the process of wealth building can begin anew in the top part of the spectrum.

Omnipotent (criminal) government lies in the bottom third of the spectrum. Under omnipotent government, bureaucratic management is rampant. Decrees, threats, and force reign supreme. The market economy is overruled. Prices and interest rates are corrupted by politics and do not reflect economic reality. The information they convey about the national wealth, the availability of credit, the relative scarcity or desire for natural resources, production machinery, or products and services, is confused and clouded. As a result, economic calculation becomes a guessing game and efficiency of production is lost.

The state dictates what is to be used as money. Always it will be paper currency, which can be printed in unlimited quantities and debased. Paper currency that can be printed without limit also allows for a high level of debt for as debt instruments mature, they can be paid off with more printing press currency. By debasing the currency, government can reach into the purse of every saver and bondholder, and by issuing more debt it can pick the pockets of those who are not yet born, to extract wealth it can use to strengthen its hold on the populace and promote its own agendas. For the individual, avenues of financial choice are limited, and maintaining the value of savings becomes difficult and fraught with risk. Crime is rampant at the highest reaches of the banking system.

For many years illusion may triumph over substance, fantasy over reality, and sleaze over truth. Socialist politicians may be very popular, have a lot of charisma, and leave many smiling and happy faces at their political gatherings, but rampant currency production cannot go on forever nor can debt be accumulated forever. Socialism has no staying power. It can appear to work until the reality of the debt level transcends illusion and the value of the fiat money approaches zero, then it must collapse.

It should be emphasized there is no third system of money that is between gold and irredeemable fiat money. Any system based on a supposed compromise between the two will always tend toward increased flexibility and away from the discipline of gold. Just as there is a dichotomy between honesty and dishonesty, so is there a dichotomy between gold and irredeemable fiat currency.

Societies organized and governed within the bottom third of the spectrum will generally languish in oppression and hardship. Nations populated by warring tribes or clans, or governed by warlords, or in which self-denial is an important national dogma, will find their home in the bottom third of the spectrum, as will nations that denigrate certain groups of people and prevent them from participating in social and market activities, or that outlaw or restrict vital elements of the free marketplace. The bottom of the spectrum is, for the great masses, the graveyard of freedom and prosperity. Within its realm, life becomes a matter of day-to-day survival.

Wealth accumulates in the top third of the spectrum, and is consumed in the lower third. The Providential Laws of Reality and Truth are observed in the top third of the spectrum, while illusion and dogma take over in the lower third. The Universal and Unifying Morality is observed in the top third of the spectrum, while an artificially contrived morality dominates in the lower third. Politicians generally speak the truth in the top third, but spew out lies and manure in the bottom third. The true economics is practiced in the top third, while false economic doctrines hold sway in the lower third. But for defense, peace prevails in the top third of the spectrum since, with gold money, the full financial cost of war must come directly out of the pockets of tax-payers on a day-by-day basis. War thrives in the lower third, since it can be paid for painlessly with debt accumulation and fiat currency fresh off the printing press.

The SEP Spectrum is anchored at the top by the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth, the Universal and Unifying Morality, market driven economic calculation, and honest money (gold). It is anchored at the bottom by ponderous, oppressive, and wealth-consuming bureaucracies, a weighty military industrial complex, senseless wars, artificial and dishonest (fiat) currency, artificial interest rates, clouded and misleading economic calculation, and a contrived moral system that allows for institutionalized theft and swindle.

Two important names within the sphere of omnipotent government are communism and fascism. Both are variants of socialism. Both may be assumed by radical or gradual means. Both may be established through democratic means. Both are police states. Both depend on forced compliance for the achievement of goals, and both have concentration camps ready for those who do not obey state edicts. Economically, there is little to differentiate them.

Indeed, it matters not what names are ascribed to omnipotent governments located in the lower third of the spectrum. All omnipotent governments are oppressive and will eventually impoverish their citizens. It is, of course, conceivable that a dictator, or a group of individuals endowed with dictatorial powers, could keep the nation they lead in the top third of the spectrum so things would run reasonably well. But it seems unlikely that such a situation could exist for a long period of time.

The First Person Singular must ask:

“Where is my government located on the SEP Spectrum and in what direction is it moving? Is socialism and government bureaucracy thriving? Do my fellow citizens assume responsibility for their own well-being or do they prefer to become wards of the state? What is used as money, gold or fiat currency? Is my government engaging in paper currency production? Is the amount of currency printed a state secret or obfuscated by complex and jargonized language? What will that lead to? Is economic calculation being corrupted by government interference? Is my government accumulating debt without limit?

Is the government usurping powers it did not have before, and do these powers take it beyond the concept of government as a component of the division of labor? Is the constitution being ignored? Are a lot of decisions being made behind closed doors? Does the government use stealth and underhanded means to influence what is happening in other countries? Is it seeking world hegemony by force? Is it engaging in aggressive military activities? Can an entrenched military industrial complex be identified? Do I approve of what is happening to my nation and to my government?

As for elections, what do the candidates stand for? What do they advocate? Where can their views be placed on the spectrum? Where can my views be placed on the spectrum? What kind of a government do I want to live under?”

These questions can now be answered with a high degree of understanding where before, only confusion reigned.

Governments located in the lower half of the SEP Spectrum, that disallow the use of gold as money, that tax unequally, that do not recognize a limit on currency printing and debt accumulation, that oppress citizens and make them vassals of the state, that habitually violate the nation’s constitution, that engage in aggressive and imperialistic wars abroad, and that are otherwise in violation of international laws and the implied conditions of their creation as a component of the division of labor, must be overthrown, and a new governmental structure created that will anchor the nation firmly in the top third of the SEP Spectrum.

In contemporary times, only a tiny handful of people have any knowledge of the above spectrum. It is amazing how the SEP Spectrum, so easily formulated with a minimum of knowledge and insight, could have escaped the attention of the great masses for such a long time.

 

Section 3. Unrestrained Democracy and the SEP Spectrum

Democracy is a system of government whereby ordinary citizens have the authority to vote leaders, even of the highest order, in and out of office at regular intervals as prescribed by law. With reasonable exemptions, each citizen has the right to cast one vote. Democracy is the only system of government that is compatible with the origin of government as a component of the division of labor. It allows each voting citizen the understanding that he or she is involved in government and has, if only in a small way, a measure of influence in determining how the government functions and the direction in which the nation is moving. There is a tacit and necessary understanding that all will live with the outcome whichever way it goes. Democracy gives the nation practicing it cohesion and strength based on individual participation and freedom. The quality of the democracy, however, and where it will lead, will be dependent upon the quality of its voters and the foresight of its leaders.

Lovers of democracy must understand that democracy encompasses the entire SEP Spectrum with the exception of a small portion near the bottom where democracy is overthrown. Therefore, to tout democracy per se has little meaning. It is like speaking from both sides of a philosophical divide. The only thing that is revealed is the ignorance of the speaker, for it makes no sense to speak of democracy without specifying where on the spectrum the democracy is to be located.

Democracy, therefore, is not automatically a good thing. It is an amoral concept. It is made moral or immoral depending on how it is organized and used, or more specifically, where the government is placed on the SEP Spectrum. Democracy must always be restrained by a strong constitution, the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth, the Universal and Unifying Morality, the concept of government as a component of the division of labor, honest money, and a judicial branch that is out of the direct reach of both the voting citizens and the Executive and Legislative Branches. The structure of an ideal government must contain defenses that discourage corruptive and immoral actions by voters and government luminaries alike. While it is difficult to move against corrupt voters, their larcenous tendencies must be recognized and dealt with as the structure of an ideal government is pieced together.

If a democratic government is kept within the bounds of reality and truth, and is maintained in the top third of the SEP Spectrum where economic calculation is fully viable, there is good reason to believe it will last indefinitely. If, however, an ignorant, corrupt, and irresponsible electorate should allow their government to fall into the lower third of the spectrum where the tenets of socialism are embraced, where fiat currency is used as money, where the government manipulates important signals in the marketplace such as interest rates, economic statistics, and the price of gold and silver, then economic calculation will lose its honesty and usefulness. Mal-investment and mal-placement of labor will become rampant and production efficiency will plummet.

As the electorate becomes increasingly troubled, they will make more demands on their government. In order to satisfy the demands of voters, government will usurp more authority onto itself, and freedom will be progressively lost. With nothing in its way, an unrestrained democracy is fully capable of taking an unsuspecting and reckless citizenry straight down into bondage and omnipotent government. Indeed, unrestrained democracy tends strongly in that direction.

 

Section 4. Unrestrained Democracy and the Abandonment of Reality and Truth

There are two sides to human life. First, there is the hard work, worry, and tedium side that all must engage in so the fruits of said hard work, worry, and tedium (the second side) might be realized and enjoyed. To be safe, one must first work to find or build a place of safety. To eat one must first purchase or produce food. First, one must labor, and only then can one enjoy the fruits of one’s labor. It is a truism imposed upon humankind by the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth.

There is a natural human desire to minimize the first side and maximize the second. If minimizing the first side is accomplished through honesty, dedication, hard work, education, talent, acquired skills, and invention, etc., all is well and good. If, however, it is accomplished through chicanery and theft, all is not well. When the dishonest try to minimize their labor by living at the expense of someone else, they are abandoning the reality and truth of toil before enjoyment.

In a social system where economic reality and truth are preserved, honest people will outnumber the dishonest by a wide margin. If, however, a door appears on the scene that posts no warning, that is both close at hand and inviting, and beyond which exists a world in which government machinations promise reduced tedium, less individual responsibility, the absence of opprobrium, and more ease and enjoyment for all, what will then be the case? Unprepared for temptation and seeing many others moving through the door what is the common person to do? Alas, when such a door is easy to pass through, most will respond.

What are these government machinations, and how can they effectively reduce the hard work, worry, and tedium of the first side, while increasing the enjoyment of the second side? At first it is easy to believe the machinations hold promise, for in truth, social policies that ameliorate the hardships of the first side, and increase the enjoyment of the second, can appear to work for a long time.

Two cases must be examined. In the first case, the second side of life is partially collectivized and leveled. Some of the rewards of hard work, worry, and tedium, are taken from the most successful and distributed to the least successful. The hardships of the least successful are thereby ameliorated. If this is accomplished within the context of reality, the true moral order, and a restrained democracy, and under the principal that the government shall only spend what it has previously obtained through taxation, all is well. A strong constitution, a strong moral system, and honest money will ensure the social programs do not corrupt the system.

In the second case, the second side of life is freed of its restraints. Voters rid themselves of quality leaders. Through their votes, citizens demand that their government be organized as a welfare state. They want their government to provide a level of healthcare, housing, and food, etc., to the general citizenry, so no one will suffer from a lack of the most basic necessities of life, and everyone will be able to live in at least a reasonable degree of comfort and security.

However, as people are rewarded for their dependency, the ranks of the dependent tend to grow. Moreover, people who are hardworking and industrious are penalized for being so with high taxes. They must support both their dependent fellow citizens and the bureaucracy that serves them. In addition, costs are deferred into the future via debt, and currency production is used to siphon wealth from those who have saved, all so that the general populace may enjoy more of the second part than is their due. Yielding to the lure of unearned benefits, reality and truth are pushed into the dark shadows of the corrupted social ethos.

It is as if society is trying to operate while standing on its head. The dependent are rewarded, while the resourceful are penalized. Savers have a portion of their savings stolen from them via currency depreciation, and children not yet born are burdened with debt. Can anything good be said about such a social structure?

Indeed, it brings to mind the behavior of the drug addict. The drug addict consumes the fuel of his/her addiction to escape the real world and enter into the world of fantasy and intoxication. Does not currency printing and debt accumulation bring about a similar escape from reality and truth, and allow a demented citizenry to enter into a world of fantasy and intoxication?

 

Section 5. Unrestrained Democracy and the Rejection of the Universal and Unifying Morality

The path of democracy and the path of the Universal and Unifying Morality are independent paths. They have nothing to do with each other except as when democracy is consciously and legally constrained by a strong constitution and universal moral principles. Under the banner of unfettered democracy, the most important of moral precepts can be compromised and perverted away.

It is, for example, a violation of the divinely sanctioned morality for voters to place luminaries into positions of high authority with the expectation the luminaries will then bestow special considerations upon those who put them in office, while shifting the costs to other people or to future generations. Voters are not absolved from the rules of moral behavior. The voting booth does not set people free from moral obligations.

Most contemporary voters are enamored with the morality of should and rights. They brush the Universal and Unifying Morality aside. They believe the moral adage that people should not steal from each other does not apply when government does the stealing through a process of unequal taxation, currency printing, and debt accumulation. Since they are not directly involved in the act of theft, they feel no guilt.

Through their votes, they demand that their government engage in a process of wealth redistribution whereby government confiscates wealth and income beyond its legitimate needs, in order to redistribute it in a manner that will satisfy the larcenous demands of voters. Basically it consists of a forceful act, in which a portion of the wealth and income of person “A” is confiscated, in order to give it to person “B” who has not earned it, and has no proper ownership of it. A second part of the wealth and income confiscated, of course, the government keeps for itself in order to support the intervening bureaucracy. Sometimes the confiscation is direct, as in the case of a punitive tax; at other times it is indirect, as in the case of currency printing and debt accumulation.

When an electorate turns away from moral leadership to follow a pandering and socialistic leadership, it is turning away from morality itself. The moment government takes wealth away from person “A” in order to give it to person “B,” the true morality is banished from the scene and a pseudo morality is crafted to take its place. Citizens must keep in mind that theft is still theft, even when it is perpetrated by government. When an individual commits an act of theft, he or she casts morality aside. When government commits an act of theft, the fate of morality is the same.

 

Section 6. Unrestrained Democracy and the Corruption of the Citizenry

People complain bitterly about corruption in government. But in a democracy, ignorant, irresponsible, and corrupt politicians find their way into government only because there are enough ignorant, irresponsible, and corrupt voters who are willing to put them there. It is unfortunate that, in an unfettered democracy, a majority of citizens will always be willing to sell their votes to the highest bidder who comes along. They do not question the morality of what they are doing. Their thinking is shallow and self-centered. They think only of today and ignore the eventual consequences of their actions. The politicians who promise voters the most benefits without tax increases generally win the elections. The responsible and thoughtful voters lose out. They can only look on in dismay as their beloved nation slides inexorably toward the lower third of the SEP Spectrum.

Corruption or not, the great masses are enamored with the idea of an idyllic life. As more social programs are enacted, more responsibility accrues to the government, leaving less to the citizenry. Every socialist program enacted, is inexorably followed by a commensurate decline in individual responsibility. People are lulled into a stupor. It is easy for them to become enamored with the vision of a utopian state, in which the good, ideal, and worry free life is made available to all, whether it is earned or not.

People want socialism because they believe society-at-large will derive benefits from it. They believe a socialist form of government is a superior instrument for the management of society than is the market economy. Citizens come to believe that it is fitting and just for government to confiscate wealth and income from the general populace, especially from the denigrated and demonized rich, and give the resultant loot, or at least a part of it, to them. Life is better, they believe, when everyone is able to live at the expense of everyone else.

Everyone is molded by the times in which they live. Successive generations accept the status quo as normal, and live their lives in accord with it. They give no thought to their corrupted work ethic and surrendered responsibilities, and readily join in the chorus for even more benefit programs. People living marginally outside of the social programs will make adjustments and gravitate into them, creating more need. As if blind, the voters do not see where their path is taking them. The social programs, which they grow to cherish, are made possible by wealth confiscation, currency production, and debt. The people do not understand they have abandoned both reality and morality. A socialist economy will always evolve into a hollow shell and will eventually collapse inward. The result of a corrupted citizenry is always economic and social devolution.

 

Section 7. Unrestrained Democracy and the Corruption of the Politicians

As a government becomes more socialistic, political machinations and a larcenous citizenry tend to filter out the honest and knowledgeable leaders and would be leaders. They are the leaders who would stand before disapproving faces and say:

“Look, you must not ask for these things. The wealth of the nation is not such that it can afford to pay for them, and it is not honest or just to defer the cost of the proposed programs into the future, thereby forcing your children and grandchildren to pay for the benefits you want to enjoy today. Neither is printing more paper currency the answer. Only the illusion of wealth, not wealth itself, flows from the currency printing presses. You can have all of the social benefit programs you want, but only if you can demonstrate to me and to your fellow citizens, that those who will be required to pay for them starting tomorrow, are willing partners.”

Such startling calls to reality are not well received. The stodgy politicians with their old-fashioned ideas are not popular. The people become indignant and turn away. They want their dreams realized and are not willing to listen to idle talk about reality and truth, balanced budgets, or the Universal and Unifying Morality. The quality leaders soon find themselves on the fringe of society, and their messages are lost to all but the most thoughtful. They become the proverbial voices in the wilderness.

Unless restrained by strong constitutional, moral, and judicial means, a democratic government will always drift toward socialism and the use of fiat currency. As it does so it becomes more of a power and influence broker. Individuals in government hold sway over large sums of money that has been taxed from the citizenry and are influential in the way it is to be distributed. Under such circumstances, it is only natural for special and moneyed interest groups to attempt to obtain favorable legislation and a share of the booty that has been expropriated from the citizenry. Candidates favorably inclined to the special and moneyed interest groups are supported by large blocks of votes and large sums of political campaign money, and are more likely to win an election or remain in office. Governing becomes less a matter of what is moral and just, and more a matter of the influence of special and moneyed interest groups, the demands of a corrupt citizenry, and power peddling politicians.

Politicians are most vulnerable to corruption when they are campaigning for office. Unfortunately, the most effective and visible means of winning votes are also the costliest. Extensive travel, speeches and other appearances, media exposure, advertisement, and a political organization that reaches into every neighborhood, all require extensive funding. That the people who provide the funding and the votes expect favors, is not lost to the politicians, nor is it a secret in many cases. This is especially true as the next election comes within view. Special considerations for the officeholder’s home district and for those who provide large sums of currency and voting blocks, are part of the game of big-time politics. That such a system amounts to corruption often goes unnoticed, or if noticed it is quickly turned away from, for it is too painful to think about.

Generally speaking, the more government is involved in the lives of the citizenry, the more social programs it institutionalizes, the more it taxes unequally, the more currency it prints, the more debt it accumulates, the more it regulates business and trade, the larger military it supports, and the more voters there are who are willing to sell their votes to politicians ready to buy them—the more authority the politicians will wield, and the more likely it is that they will be corrupted at their stations.

One of the grand failures of the unfettered democratic system, is that it offers little disincentive for politicians who seek to promote their own ego and careers by pandering to the utopian demands of citizens for new or expanded social services. Most people are not well schooled in economic theory or have been indoctrinated into false ones. Similarly, few politicians have any understanding of the practical limitations of centralized economic planning, and those that do are not listened to.

When a social issue garners a lot of attention, and large numbers of citizens are demanding some kind of action be taken, most politicians are ready to turn toward centralized government planning as the only possible solution. Outside of the theories that everyone should be responsible for their own sustenance and behavior, and that it is an individual duty to provide for those who cannot help themselves, theories usually out of favor, it is the only solution that can be seen. It is unfortunate the collectivist tenet, that all is possible through omnipotent government, is a much easier sell than the idea of hard work, frugal living, saving, responsibility for one’s self, and the support of private institutions dedicated to helping those who are poorly equipped to help themselves.

The people, therefore, turn to precisely those who are ready and willing to play the game of big time politics. It must be granted that the huckster politicians are usually not aware they are doing anything wrong. They believe what they are saying, are honest in their own minds, and may sound very convincing. They are focused on following the path they think will offer them the best chance of winning the office they dream of holding, and their thinking and arguments are adjusted accordingly. They are not aware of the moral compromises they are making, or the ruin that must eventually come to any nation that embraces the doctrines they champion. The gate to the bottom third of the SEP Spectrum is wide open.

 

Section 8. Unrestrained Democracy and the Triumph of Bureaucracy

It is an inherent feature of socialist states that they must be organized from the top. Bureaucracies thrive as governments become more socialistic. Huge bureaucracies are required to dispense services to a myriad of recipients, and to do so they must rob wealth from the citizenry under the guise of social necessity and justice. To allow the wholesale robbery that socialism depends on to occur at the individual level would quickly reveal the immorality of the concept. Person “A” robbing directly from person “B” is too obvious.

In addition, the weight of bureaucracy necessarily corrupts the market derived price edifice and its concomitant economic calculation, the very things that bring efficiency and productive prowess to any economy. As economic activity falters, the bureaucrats expand their authority, convinced that their judgments are superior to the collective judgments of tens of millions of people, as reflected in the free, market driven price edifice.

Rather than seeking employment in the hampered and derided private sector, large numbers of people find security and prosperity through government employment. As bureaucratic rule becomes entrenched, people setting at the top of the various bureaucracies seek authority and self-aggrandizement through empire building. The waste, corruption, and inefficiency of bureaucratic rule become established norms. The bureaucracy feeds on the very disorder it creates.

 

Section 9. Unrestrained Democracy and the Destruction of the National Currency

Unfettered democracy will always tend toward its own ruin. It tends away from that which is moral and within the bounds of reality and truth, and toward collectivist ideas that people dream about, or that simply garner the most votes for a particular luminary or political institution. The dreamers recognize no moral constraints, and once their institutions become enshrined by time and usage, the institutions become well-nigh impossible to dislodge short of economic breakdown or revolt. Voters discover they can demand, and get, more than is their due. Politicians cater to the whims of the voters by granting goods and services, while relieving them of the full burden of payment for those goods and services. The popularity of the politicians is enhanced and their reelection to office is assured. No one thinks of the future. As decades pass massive government debt is accumulated to extract wealth from future generations, and massive paper currency production is used to extract wealth from the pockets of all who are foolish enough to save. As the system of plunder matures, debt must be accumulated more rapidly, and the currency presses must run faster and faster, to keep the economy from falling into a violent correction.

A time must come, however, when the unthinkable happens. Large numbers of people finally wake up and realize their paper currency is being debased and will continue to be debased even more rapidly in the future. There is a sudden and violent movement away from fiat currency and fiat currency denominated assets, toward tangible assets such as real estate, equipment, foreign currencies, and the precious metals, etc. As the nation’s currency and assets denominated in the nation’s currency are dumped onto the market they lose value even more rapidly, which exacerbates the flight to tangible assets. Nobody wants to hold the hated currency. Finally, the nation’s currency and everything denominated in it becomes essentially valueless. The value of both debt and savings vanish into thin air. Commerce shuts down as the medium of exchange it feeds on has ceased to exist. Employment collapses. Utilities shut down. Natural gas, electricity, and water stop flowing into homes and businesses. There is a sudden and violent outburst of lawlessness that the police are unable to control. Stores and other businesses are looted until their shelves are bare. Gangs of thugs roam the streets looting and burning as they go. Safety is nowhere to be found.

People cry out for order, with little concern about how the order will be restored, or what kind of new governing authority will be put in place to restore the order. They are not willing to go back to the system they believe failed them and know that massive changes must take place. They will never believe, even for a moment, that they are responsible for their own misfortunes. People are ready to listen to anyone who promises salvation. The gate is wide open for a long period of tyranny and bondage in the lower third of the SEP Spectrum.

 

Section 10. The Architrave of Freedom

Modern dictionaries define the word freedom in minimal and simplistic terms such as “an absence of restraints” etc. In the case of large and complex social structures, the definitions offered by dictionaries do not suffice. If citizens want to protect their freedom, they must have a more sophisticated understand of what the word means. The word freedom is best understood as an architrave resting on four columns.

 

 

The first column represents Individual Responsibility. Individual responsibility is a necessary concomitant of freedom. It signifies that if people want to be free, they must fulfill the responsibilities that nature assigns to them and not try to foist those responsibilities onto their neighbors, who would then be reduced to a state of bandage. If that should happen, the following questions must be asked: In what sense does freedom allow one group of people to reduce another group to an unwilling and unjustified state of bondage? Is freedom something that can be parceled out to some people but not others? Is freedom for the privileged few?

No! Either the word freedom means something or it does not. Either the word applies to all people in the same way and to the same degree, or it has no meaning whatsoever.

Unless limited by special considerations, the First Person Singular beyond young adulthood should be providing for his or her own well-being. When marriage comes, the First Person Singular, not some else, is responsible for providing shelter, food, and security for the marriage partner and resultant children. When illness strikes the family, the First Person Singular, not someone else, must assume responsibility for the care of the afflicted and medical costs that might ensue. When children reach school age, it is the responsibility of the parents, not someone else, to provide for the education of their children. When aged parents require assistance in living, it is the responsibility of the First Person Singular, not someone else, to provide that assistance.

There is no doubt these responsibilities are frightening for many to contemplate. It should be remembered that in a well-developed and free society, individuals and charitable institutions will usually be ready to volunteer a helping hand when the need arises. The purchase of insurance can also mitigate many of the problems the First Person Singular might encounter.

The second column represents the Universal and Unifying Morality. When individual responsibility fails for lack of discipline, and government usurps those responsibilities that nature assigns to the individual, then the second column, as well as the first, is assailed. A new and false morality is contrived that supports the government policy of taxing everybody to provide for those in need of assistance. Once the idea that government should assume the responsibilities nature assigns to the individual is accepted by the general populace and sanctioned by the contrived morality, it is multiplied many times for different situations and eventually reduces to the principle that the needs of society are best served if everyone can live at the expense of everyone else. Stated another way, everyone has a legal and moral right to a part of the wealth of all other citizens. What kind of morality is that? Is it not the morality of thieves and swindlers? Social structures based on this principle may thrive for many years, even decades, but will eventually fall into decay and ruin.

The Universal and Unifying Morality does not yield to immoral whims of the citizenry or to political expediencies. It, alone, provides the ethically neutral discipline and guidance for all people seeking a peaceful and cooperative environment in which to live. It assigns primary responsibilities to the individual, not to political institutions.

The third column signifies that freedom must be supported by disciplined and honest money, which is to say, gold. Gold cannot be printed, and private and social debt is limited by the amount of gold people are freely willing to save and make available to the loan market. Though many may grow impatient with it, gold imposes a discipline on citizens and leaders alike that prevents errors in economic judgments and keeps the social order on the straight and narrow path of reality, truth, righteousness, and sustainability.

The fourth column signifies that businesses must be owned by individuals and shareholders. When that is the case, business competition and consumer reaction to what business offers, gives rise to a price edifice, which can be used by business leaders to calculate product or service feasibility, profit and loss, and the best and cheapest ways of putting things together, as well as by individuals who want to determine the affordability of something they want. The price edifice guides business decisions. Consumer reaction determines what will be made and in what quality and quantity. The price edifice is a necessary concomitant of a thriving economy and a prosperous society.

When businesses are owned or directed by government, bureaucrats determine what is to be made and in what quantity. Consumers (citizens) are only indirectly consulted, if at all. There is no effective business competition and the price edifice is stifled. Bureaucratic managers are left with no effective economic guidance. They must rely on intuition and guesswork. The result is never equal to what privately owned businesses, operating under the guidance of a viable price edifice, can accomplish.

Freedom remains secure as long as all four columns are in place. If one column fails, freedom is threatened. If two fail, the freedom architrave will break and fall down. It may also happen that all four columns will decay at the same time, and freedom will slowly wither away. The above colonnade could be easily added to, but the four columns portrayed perform the task adequately. They will warn the reader when freedom is under assault.

Under a system of freedom bounded by realistic and moral considerations, government exists to secure and promote the freedom of individuals. Government is kept under tight rein so it does not become a force onto its own. The ultimate authority is in the hands of the people. People are free to secure their lives and enjoy the fruits of their labor and invention. The Providential Laws of Reality and Truth, the Universal and Unifying Morality, and the free marketplace determine what the medium of exchange will be. Economic calculation is honest, viable, and meaningful, and makes for an efficient system of doing business. Prosperity reigns. Though the system may not be perfect, the vast majority of people are relieved of want and there is sufficient wealth available through voluntary giving to help those who do not share in the prosperity. The above four columns stand strong.

In the contemporary world, the supporting pillars of the architrave of freedom are in a serious state of injury. Not only are they under heavy assault by socialism and the pseudo economics, but the structure is also suffering from omission on the part of the great masses. The great masses are not aware of the concept of freedom as it is described in these paragraphs, or how important it is to their well-being. In their state of ignorance and selfishness, they wholeheartedly embraced the pseudo morality of should and rights.

As a consequence, currency printing and debt accumulation are rampant throughout the world. Fiat currency is corrupting everything it comes in contact with, and debt is saturating the financial markets. Major political and financial structures are permeated with corruption. Criminals sit in plush bank, corporate, and legislative offices, pretending to have the best interests of their patrons and constituents at heart, but behind closed doors, they plot for their own benefit and do not hesitate to use privileged information and their authoritative offices to enrich themselves. Customer accounts in every bank and brokerage firm are now at risk of piecemeal theft or outright confiscation.

Criminal justice systems are in a state of paralysis. They are checkmated by big money interests and bought-off political lackeys. People who, in former years, would have been sentenced to long prison terms, brazenly walk about with smiles on their faces and show no thought or fear of retribution. Collapsing fiat currencies are rapidly pushing nations into the vortex of economic and social chaos, and dark and terrible years surely lie ahead for a great portion of the world’s population. All of the supporting pillars of the freedom architrave are rapidly deteriorating. It is a terrible sight to behold.

If people want to live in freedom, they must always be mindful of their responsibilities for keeping their government in the top third of the SEP Spectrum. All voters must be in possession of enough knowledge of the real and true morality and the real and true economics so they can cast their ballots on the basis of moral and economic principles, and in a manner that reflects the responsibility that freedom imposes upon them.

Voters who are unlearned, are easily swayed by mundane happenings and pronouncements, and are willing to sell their votes to politicians who promise the most benefits, fail themselves, their progeny, their community, their nation, and the future, as they stand at the voting booth. They should stay home on election-day, for they have nothing to contribute to the cause of sound government.

 

Section 11. The Perversion of the Words Criminal and Radical

A distinction must be made between criminals in the normal sense, which is to say those guilty of murder, rape, robbery, assault, and fraud, etc., and those labeled as criminals by governments that are themselves criminal institutions.

When a national government turns itself into a criminal institution, when it forgets that it is a component of the division of labor, when it writes laws that violate the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth and the Universal and Unifying Morality, when it yields to moneyed interests, when it institutionalizes a fiat currency system, when it loots from savers by printing large sums of additional paper currency, when it loots from future generations by running up large and unpayable sums of debt, when it imprisons or kills political opponents or protestors, and when it wages aggressive and unjustifiable wars, then it should be obvious to all that the criminal justice system is in a major state of moral breakdown and corruption. Those engaged in the fight to rebuild and reform the government should not consider it an obstacle for aggressive action.

The person who joins others in mass demonstrations against immoral government policies or leadership is not a lawbreaker; she or he is acting heroically. The police officer who refuses to apprehend or move against citizens who are doing nothing more than demonstrating their disdain for their criminal government, is not guilty of wrongdoing; she or he is acting heroically. The general who refuses a foul order given by a rogue commander-in-chief is not a traitor; she or he is a hero. The soldier who abandons his uniform because the army of which he is a part is engaged in an aggressive and unjustifiable war, is not a deserter or a criminal; she or he is a hero. The soldier who refuses an order to wantonly kill noncombatants, or to torture, is not a criminal; she or he is a hero. The person who kills a tyrant or reveals lies and criminal acts on the part of government is not a traitor; she or he is acting heroically.

The word radical, in the sense of social and political activism, also deserves a measure of attention. Logically, the word must be defined against the backdrop of the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth and the Universal and Unifying Morality. However, the word is often used pejoratively as a label for those who would move a government into the top third of the SEP Spectrum. After all, how dare anyone suggest that citizens should have an equal and accurate understanding of the burden of government! How dare anyone suggest that deferring debt to future generations is a form of theft! How dare anyone suggest that printing currency is a form of theft! How dare anyone suggest that the virtual buying and selling of votes is a form of corruption! How dare anyone suggest that a political structure premised upon mutual plunder cannot last! Surely, such people are radicals, and their ravings should be condemned.

No! To use the word radical in the above sense is to turn the word upside-down. The people who believe it is acceptable to defer costs onto future generations are the radicals! The people who believe it is unimportant for citizens to understand the burden of their government are the radicals! People who see nothing wrong with printing currency, politicians dispensing benefits in return for votes, and citizens looting from each other via the political process, they are the radicals! The First Person Singular must be ever ready to rail against the misuse of this important word.

In the long run, it is much better for citizens to live within the bounds of the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth and the Universal and Unifying Morality. Citizens must keep both money and government on the straight and narrow path of righteousness. A government based on reality, truth, and righteousness, and rooted firmly in the top third of the SEP Spectrum is highly durable and will yield only to the worst of natural calamities.

 

Section 12. The Nefarious and Propagandistic Use of the word Terrorism

There is nothing more demonstrative of a corrupt and militaristic government than its use of the word terrorism. Depending on the context, the word can have different meanings. Here in the US it is generally used to describe the actions of a supposedly dastardly and sub-human group of people who have no feeling for compassion or righteousness. They generally do their work in non-combat zones, and in ways that will kill or maim the largest numbers of innocents. The word terrorism is used very deliberately to enflame the hearts of US citizens so they will not object to the rampant US militarism that has been let loose upon the world over the past several decades.

Every time a bomb is set off in a crowded marketplace or a shooting takes place in a crowded theatre or restaurant, political leaders use the word terrorism time and time again. The mass media is quick to emphasize the bombings and shootings on the evening news. Newscasters reinforce the condemnations expressed by political leaders, but only rarely attempt any in-depth analysis. It would be too easy to stumble on the true cause of the tragedies. Viewers and listeners are taught to hate.

Seen in its proper light, terrorism is a military strategy used by an offended people who do not have the ability to fight a war with a superior power in the conventional way—soldier by soldier, tank by tank, and airplane by airplane.

Thoughtful citizens must step back from this fearsome spectacle and engage in some overdue introspection. Who are these perpetrators? How did they grow up? Is it not true they have mothers, fathers, brothers and sisters who love them? Were they helpful at home as they grew up? Did they get good grades at school? Did classmates and friends think them likable? In a relaxed social setting, would the reader of these lines think them likable? What drives them to do what they do?

The final question is the one most easily explored, and a word comes immediately to mind. That word is hatred. Hatred is not the only impetus that drives people to kill in a wanton fashion, even to the degree that they sometimes kill themselves in the process, but it is, perhaps, a driving force we can most easily understand. Indeed, we would do well to think of terrorism as an offshoot of hatred. In the absence of hatred, isn’t it true that most terrorism would quickly fade away? If terrorism is an offshoot of hatred, isn’t it true that to answer hatred with more hatred is a dead-end street? Can hatred be killed by force of arms?

Wouldn’t it be more fruitful to ask the question: Why do certain people hate us so fervently that they are willing to sacrifice their own lives in order to inflict harm upon us? This is a simple question easily arrived at. Why isn’t it asked? When was the last time you, the reader, heard this question posed by a prominent politician or newscaster? Isn’t it true that if we stopped doing the things that make people hate us, terrorism would subside and may eventually go away? Why isn’t the question discussed in the mass media?

It is quite evident that something sinister is going on behind the scenes. US news media is filtered. US newscasters are not allowed to say what they want to say. They are well paid and easily acquiesce. The way US citizens think, and what they believe or reject, is being controlled by the owners of the news networks and wealthy institutions that can make or break politicians. They are the same people who are behind the US quest for world domination.

Their use of the word terrorism is successful. The offending nation, in our case the United States, is made to feel victimized. The war against terrorism has become a battle cry. It is being successfully used to justify and institutionalize the blatant militarism that brought about the so-called terrorism in the first place. The vicious circle is complete and the lovers and profiteers of war reign supreme.

The true victims in this tragedy are the common people and soldiers on both sides of the conflict, and especially the families of the dead and wounded. Whole cities have been laid waste and millions of lives destroyed or ruined, all to the benefit of mega-wealthy bankers and industrialists who want to control the world.

Uncontrolled hatred can sometimes drive people insane and cause them to commit the worst of atrocities. This is especially true when hatred is combined with religious dogmatism. However, observers must keep a cool head and trace the conflict back to its origins. Only then will they find the true source of the evil.

Readers who do not believe these lines should undertake a personal investigation, via the internet, of what really happened on 9/11/2001. Start with WTC Building Seven.

 

Back to Top

 

 

****

 

 

Chapter Six

Revolution

 

Section 1. Revolting against a Democratic Government that has Lost its Way

People may rise up in righteous revolt whenever their government is seen plunging downward within the central part of SEP Spectrum. Governments operating in the lower third of the SEP Spectrum are no longer operating as components of the division of labor, nor are their structures consistent with the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth, and the Universal and Unifying Morality. It is the Moral Duty of every citizen, every member of the governing bureaucracy, both federal and state, as well as every member of the military and police forces to join in revolt. Inaction in the face of immoral despotism does not become the moral person no matter what his or her station in society may be. Everyone must be willing to share in the responsibility and risk of overthrowing immoral and despotic regimes, with the goal of establishing a government set firmly in the top third of the SEP Spectrum. Leaders must have a revised constitution ready for immediate implementation should the revolt succeed. Its early publication will educate the public and galvanize the desire for change.

Massive but nondestructive and nonviolent street demonstrations, is the best way to force a regime change. Occurring day after day and week after week, they will take their toll on the most powerful of despotic regimes. If policing authorities react violently to demonstrators then women must step to the fore. It is much harder for the police to mistreat or kill women. As news of the demonstrations is spread around the globe, the weight of world opinion and political diplomacy will hopefully complement the revolt and increase its chance for success.

As the crisis becomes manifest, the First Person Singular must never turn away from the concept of government as a component of the division of labor and what is morally proper. An inclusive, democratic government, based on freedom and the Universal and Unifying Morality, must always be favored over an exclusive dictatorship, whether secular or religious. All righteous people must work and fight toward that end. In chaotic times it may be difficult to maintain one’s moral compass, but even under the worst of circumstances, it is the duty of the First Person Singular to maintain a clear head and a stout heart. There are always moments for quiet thinking. Understanding and righteousness will point the way.

Acting with others is easier than acting alone. Those who understand what constitutes a righteous government must band together for mutual support and provide the leadership that is needed to counter those who would deliver the country into bondage. In tumultuous times when all is at risk, good people cannot afford to stand by and do nothing. They must stand in the forefront and lead!

 

Section 2. Saving the Currency

When a nation allows its economy to deteriorate into a system driven by money production, debt accumulation, and fractional reserve banking, the best thing it can do is to abandon the system as quickly as possible. Currency production must be outlawed, the means of currency production dismantled, and interest rates allowed to rise to their market value. Market-driven interest rates will quickly put the debt structure and other excesses into their true perspective.

Though stopping the currency printing presses might appear counter-intuitive because of the way it will immediately reveal the full horror and magnitude of past sins, there is no sense in trying to delay the day of reckoning. It will come sooner or later, and the longer it is delayed the worse and longer lasting the ensuing turmoil will be. Citizens must anticipate and accept that market-driven interest rates will precipitate innumerable government, business and personal bankruptcies. There will be a tremendous deflation of currency. The nation must brace itself for a period of hardship, homelessness, starvation, and rampant crime.

Hopefully, political leaders will rouse themselves from their intoxication with printing fiat currency and all of its opprobrious ramifications, and surrender to their duty of preserving the currency and putting their country back on the straight and narrow path of honest money and the one true moral order. Failing that, citizens must take to the streets. By the hundreds of thousands, day after day, week after week, and month after month, they must march on the nation’s capital buildings and the central bank buildings. At work or at home, the highest ranking political leaders and central bank officials should know not a moment of peace. Much is at stake. If the currency inflation can be stopped short of the currency being rendered absolutely valueless, recovery will be easier. The currency, though weak, can be exchanged for gold bars or coins. If, however, the currency is rendered valueless, everything must start anew, for there is no basis for surrendering gold bars or coins in exchange for something that has no value.

When the nation’s currency is destroyed, the treasure trove of information contained in the price edifice is also lost. Without a working economy, economic calculation breaks down. Consequences are bound to be profound and long lasting. No one knows how long it takes to build a working price edifice from scratch. There is no greater tragedy than when a nation’s currency is printed into oblivion. Business activity grinds to a halt, and exchange is reduced to bartering. It is extremely important that the citizens and regional political leaders take action before that happens.

 

Section 3. Understanding the Dangers

The risks associated with revolt must be clearly understood. The most obvious is the threat to life and limb. If the police and military support the regime, a likely scenario since that is where their pay comes from, a river of blood may stand between righteous people and their goal of a better life. It may even be that the majority of the citizens will, for various reasons, support the regime, despotic or not. Many may not trust the leaders behind the revolt. They may fear the violence or chaos that might ensue, the loss of their jobs, or the consequences if the revolt should fail. Indeed, there are a host of things that can go wrong. Groups with different goals may join together in revolt, only to fight over the spoils once the despotic regime is overthrown. The battles, with resultant social turmoil and suffering, may drag on for years.

Leadership may also be of the wrong kind. In desperate and impassioned times, the powerful desire for change can take people down ominous paths. A revolt may start as a simple show of discontent and demand for change. Its spontaneity may include a measure of chaos. If strong leadership is lacking, the excitement will afford unscrupulous but determined people the opportunity to rise to the fore. Participating citizens had better know who they are following and what the leaders stand for. There are many examples in history of a despotic regime yielding to revolt, only to be replaced by another that was just as bad, or worse, than the one displaced.

While street demonstrations may bring out the best in people, they also afford opportunities for rogues. If police are ill prepared and yield the streets to demonstrators, many, especially the poor and youthful, will see it as an opportunity to smash and loot. While demonstrators may shut down commerce and government operations by their numbers, it is their responsibility to remain otherwise peaceful. People who take advantage of the absence or immobility of policing authorities to commit crimes must be treated as common criminals and forcefully dealt with. A mass demonstration is not a license to loot, destroy property, or assault people, including policing personnel and soldiers.

Organizers of mass demonstrations must recruit vigilantes to guard against those who would take advantage of the excitement to commit criminal acts and stain the cause of the demonstration. When a segment of a demonstration becomes a crazed mob and goes on a rampage of destruction and looting, the police are within their rights, indeed it is their duty, to use whatever force is necessary to restore order. Smashing and looting discredit any cause, and give the authorities an excuse to break up demonstrations and move against the revolt leadership.

Participating in a national revolt is serious business. Many lives may be lost. Revolt leaders may be targeted for arrest or assassination. Alas, if a revolt is to succeed, large numbers of citizens must be willing to assume the risks. Small meetings, underground newsletters, and surreptitious channels of communication can be used to initiate mass demonstrations. If used properly and with persistence, mass demonstrations are fully capable of dislodging a despotic government.

An armed revolt, which may become a civil war, is the most dangerous and problematic form of revolt. If the result is large-scale destruction, killing, and suffering, the cause may easily lose its meaning and purpose. Victims will come to view the cause as just another form of oppression and insanity. An armed revolt must be avoided at all costs.

A massive educational campaign must precede the revolt. The people must be made aware of the purpose of the revolt and who its leaders are. Leadership must be strong, respected, and unified. They must have plans in place should they become successful in their quest. Chaos and indecision in the days immediately following a regime change will prove to be very costly. As much as practical, existing police and military units, as well as the governing bureaucracy, should be employed to provide a smooth transition into the future.

 

Section 4. The New Pledge of Allegiance

The new Pledge of Allegiance shall be to the Revised Constitution, the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth, the Universal and Unifying Morality, and the concept of government as a component of the division of labor—not to the nation, the flag, the head of state, or the congress. As has been proven, the old Pledge of Allegiance to the flag has not prevented the constitution from being ignored, or hubris, secrecy, and crime from infesting the highest reaches of our government. No thoughtful or righteous person should feel hesitant about turning their backs to the old Pledge of Allegiance. It has served the nation poorly. While the focus is on the flag, and the flag exudes patriotism, government and the military are free to run amuck, as they are doing.

The new pledge shall read as follows:

 

I pledge allegiance to the Revised Constitution of the United States of America, the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth, Moral Duty, the Universal and Unifying Morality, the concept of government as a component of the division of labor, and its placement in the top third of the SEP Spectrum. In all that I do and say, from this day forward, this pledge shall be my guiding light. I shall forever abide by it so my fellow countrymen, alive and yet to be born, may live the full measure of their lives free of war, tyranny, currency printing and debt, and with as much prosperity as nature, earthly guardianship, honest money, and a morally and responsibly regulated market economy will provide.

 

With the ratification of Article XXVIII, the new Pledge of Allegiance will replace the old in all circumstances. All who are employed by the revolution, or are employed as a result of revolutionary restructuring, and all who work for the federal government, or any of its departments, bureaus, offices, or agencies, etc., including the military, shall be required to recite the above pledge in a formal setting.

By tying their purpose and allegiance to the above, government employees and citizens alike will best serve the long-term interests of the nation, and prevent it from straying outside the bounds of reality, truth, and the Universal and Unifying Morality.

 

Back to Top

 

 

****

 

 

Chapter Seven

The Decriminalization and Restructuring Commission (DRC)

 

Section 1. Introduction

This commission will be responsible for implementing lynchpin structural changes required by the ratification of Article XXVIII. Members must proceed boldly with their work and not be troubled by the cries of entrenched bureaucrats, bankers, and tycoons. They are the ones who have laid waste the country and will bring death and ruin to millions of citizens in the months and years ahead. They do not qualify as part of the rebuilding crew.

For clarity, readers are encouraged to explore Part Five (The Revolution Congress) before proceeding with this chapter. The Revolution Congress will be the initial focus for the consideration of Article XXVIII and will operate outside of it. The work of the DRC on the other hand, must have the full authority of Article XXVIII behind it. Of necessity therefore, the DRC must operate within the confines of Article XXVIII (from Part One through the end of Part Four).

The commission and its subsidiary offices will be organized, staffed, and supervised by a committee of the Revolution Congress. Assuming it will prove useful, a workable mix of bureaucrats or agents, etc., employed by the institutions being dismantled or restructured should be utilized. Their knowledge, if it is honestly offered, should prove enormously helpful in accomplishing the various assignments with a reasonable degree of efficiency. All commission employees and volunteers must sign a Letter of Compliance and Cooperation, and take the pledge as noted in the previous chapter.

It is important to note that the DRC and its subordinated offices, as well as the offices, etc. of the expanded Judiciary, each with their designated and implied duties, and the authority to accomplish those duties, will be created and authorized the moment Article XXVIII is ratified. In the same moment, the so-called Federal Reserve System and fractional reserve banking of any degree will be outlawed. It must be anticipated that this act will collapse fractional reserve depository institutions of all descriptions if they are not already collapsed.

For most of a century the United States has been living a fanciful and exaggerated lifestyle financed by currency printing, debt accumulation, and fractional reserve banking. As a consequence our government and financial system have become tremendously bloated. Rather than trying to consciously redesign every aspect of government and finance to fit the new paradigm of honest money and frugal living, it will be easier and perhaps more fruitful to allow certain departments, bureaus, and agencies etc., to be starved down either to die or to the point where they can be supported by a reluctant and hard-pressed populace. In-place directors are in the best position to decide what can be saved and what must go. Cleaving will have to be harsh.

This method of reduction will be used for everything not addressed directly by the DRC. It is likely that most of the criminal activity not addressed by the DRC will be decimated by the starvation diet. Under the new paradigm, taxpayers will demand that every dollar be wisely spent.

The DRC will be assigned the most difficult and resistance prone tasks of the revolution. It will concentrate on the mega-tasks of decommissioning, dismantling, decriminalizing, reducing, and restructuring. The commission will also be given the means of enforcing its work as enforcement becomes necessary.

The DRC will be the first tier of a three tier system for reorganization, and in some cases dismantling, the various problematic institutions of the financial sector and government, including the Fed. What is left of the institutions, if anything, will fall under the purview of the Judiciary’s Bureau of Regulation (the second tier) for development of tailored items of regulation. Though many people may complain about government regulation, it is better than allowing the rich and powerful to impose their own forms of usually criminal operating practices. A great deal of regulatory authority will still remain in the hands of the legislative branch.

The third tier will be the Judiciary’s Bureau of Litigation. Through the Bureau of Litigation, common citizens may initiate class action law suits against the high and mighty. From the richest of bankers, industrialists, investors, board members, CEO’s, and CFO’s, to the most powerful military and political leaders, no one will be too big to jail. The Bureau of Litigation will keep luminaries of every stripe treading the straight and narrow path, from the ratification of Article XXVIII into perpetuity.

The DRC will supervise, coordinate, and finance the work of the following twelve offices. The concluded work, in the form of a report, from each subordinate office must garner the approved of at least seven of the nine commissioners. Approved reports will then be sent to the Revolution Congress for its consideration.

The DRC must be assigned a life-span by the Revolution Congress. It should not be more than six months. Citizens will be suffering and will be intolerant of any lengthy process for improvement. Moreover, a short life-span will encourage a meat-cleaver approach to the de-criminalization of our government and financial system—precisely what is needed.

 

Section 2. The Office of Policing and Investigations

This office will be a branch of the Judiciary’s Bureau of Policing and Investigations. It will have an anticipated life span of six months, the same as the DRC. Its purpose is to provide law enforcement assistance to the following offices whenever and wherever it is needed. Staff members will have the power to arrest and detain for the duration of the transition period. However, they will not carry arms—this in keeping with the peaceful intent of the revolution. Those detained will be housed in prisons of participating states.

 

Section 3. The Office of Federal Debt Repudiation and the Declaration of Bankruptcy of all Social Benefit Programs that have their Reserve Accounts Denominated in Worthless US Government Instruments of Debt

This office will seize those aspects of the Treasury’s Fiscal Service having to do with debt servicing and the funding of social benefit programs (see below).

A nation that owes its sustenance to money printing and debt accumulation is certainly incapable of honest debt repayment. It is a reality that must be faced squarely, as it should have been faced many decades ago when repairs might have been possible. In this year of 2017, it makes no sense to try to save any of the federal debt. With the ratification of Article XXVIII, all US debt is repudiated and reduced to zero. A high resistance to the re-emergence of debt and credit will be built into the system.

Tragically, this act will render hundreds of social benefit programs, including Social Security and Medicare, bankrupt, since their reserve accounts are denominated in US debt certificates. The hard-earned cash that millions of trusting citizens deposited in these accounts has been pilfered by the government, spent, and replaced with debt certificates that can never be repaid. As a consequence, dark and ominous days lie ahead for tens of millions of dependent citizens. Doubtless millions will parish. There is no helping it. The wealth needed to prevent it from happening does not exist. The nation will have to go through a period of pure anguish. It may take years to recover from the madness of the past.

This office will sanction the repudiation of all US debt and identify and publicize all benefit programs and trust accounts rendered bankrupt by the repudiation. Citizens will have to start planning for a life without government support.

Any programs remaining viable will be transferred to the Legislative Branch’s Department of Health and Human Services for servicing.

Members of this office must keep the six month time constraint in mind and that their work will not be complete until it is accepted by the DRC and the Revolution Congress.

 

Section 4. The Office of Receivership of the US Department of the Treasury

This office will seize and occupy the Department of the Treasury building in Washington, DC, and initiate the following:

1. The United States Mint, including all police services, depositories, and their contents, etc., will transfer in its entirety to the OCPMMS (see Part Four, Chapter One, Section 23).

Officers of the Mint will secure and inventory all vaulted gold holdings within the Treasury Building. Large cash hordes and unallocated gold or gold allocated to wealthy banking families or any of the institutions they control, including foreign central banks, shall, with the consent of the DRC’s oversight committee of the Revolution Congress (see Part Five, Item 16) be nationalized and transferred to the Judiciary’s OCPMMS’ Captured Cash Account or Captured Precious Metals Account.

Officers of the mint will also secure and inventory all cash and gold holdings in all of the nation’s gold depositories. Large cash hordes and unallocated gold or gold allocated to wealthy banking families or any of the institutions they control, including foreign central banks, shall, with the consent of the DRC’s oversight committee of the Revolution Congress, be nationalized and transferred to the Judiciary’s OCPMMS’ Captured Cash Account or Captured Precious Metals Account.

Officers of the Mint will have the authority to arrest and detain anyone resisting the capture process. Detention will be for the duration of the transition period. Prisoners will be housed in low-risk facilities of participating states.

The same will hold true for the following item.

2. The secretive and lawless Exchange Stabilization Fund shall be decommissioned and dismantled.

The ESF will have no role to play in the open and above-board restructured financial system. Its activities and ledgers, if they exist, will be audited and made public. All property will be secured and made available to future investigators. Captured cash and precious metals will be secured by the officers of the US Mint, and transferred to the Judiciary’s OCPMMS to be deposited in the Captured Cash Account or Captured Precious Metals Account.

3. The Internal Revenue Service shall be extracted in whole from the Treasury Department and assigned to the Judiciary’s OCCGT (see Part Four, Chapter One, Section 25).

As soon as it is up and running, its income will be available to start funding the revolution. Beyond that it will fund the activities of the Judicial, Legislative, and Executive Branches.

4. The Bureau of Engraving and Printing shall be extracted in whole from the US Treasury and blended into the Judiciary’s OCPMMS.

5. The remaining service components of the US Treasury will be distributed in the most logical fashion among the various offices of the expanded Judiciary.

Services incompatible with the reformed government will be decommissioned.

6. The US Treasury building and what is left of the US Department of the Treasury will be transferred to the Legislative Branch’s Department of Financial Records to provide that department with its housing and basic structure.

7. Treasury Department criminal activity will be fully documented and the results made public.

Perpetrators will be detained by the DRC’s OPI and transferred, together with evidence, to the Judiciary’s Bureau of Truth and Reconciliation for processing.

Officers of Section 2 (above) will have the authority to arrest and detain anyone resisting the receivership process. Detention will be for the duration of the transition period. Prisoners will be housed in low-risk facilities of participating states.

Members of this office must keep the six month time constraint in mind and that their work will not be complete until it is accepted by the DRC and the Revolution Congress.

 

Section 5. The Office of the Decommissioning and Dismantling of the Federal Reserve System

With the ratification of Article XXVIII, the Federal Reserve System is abolished. Its authority is reduced to zero. This office will nationalize and occupy the Fed’s headquarters building in Washington, DC without compensation to owners.

Officers of Section 2 (above) will have the authority to arrest and detain anyone resisting the capture process. Detention will be for the duration of the transition period. Prisoners will be housed in low-risk facilities of participating states.

Activities of the Fed will be investigated, its ledgers audited, and the resultant information made public. Officers of the Mint will secure and inventory all cash hordes and vaulted gold holdings in the building if any. Cash hordes and unallocated gold or gold allocated to wealthy banking families or any of the institutions they control, including foreign central banks, shall, with the consent of the DRC’s oversight committee of the Revolution Congress (see Part Five, Item 16) be nationalized and transferred to the Judiciary’s OCPMMS’ Captured Cash Account or Captured Precious Metals Account.

All records and equipment will be secured and made available to future investigators. Employees guilty of criminal activities will be turned over to the Judiciary’s Bureau of Truth and Reconciliation, together with evidence, for processing.

The Fed’s impressive marbled building in Washington DC will be converted into a museum. Henceforth the building will bear the name, the National Museum of Monetary Corruption. Displays will be created to demonstrate how central banks institutionalize monetary corruption and theft. The displays should meticulously explain how central banks create currency and credit, surreptitiously redistribute wealth, manipulate interest rates, unduly enrich central bank owners, artificially fund government deficits, protect member banks from the discipline of the marketplace, and promote economic hyperactivity that the future will not support, all uneconomic, unethical, and criminal practices.

This office will officially announce that Federal Reserve currency is, henceforth, federal government currency. Control of the nation’s currency will be transferred from the defunct Federal Reserve System including the New York Fed, the defunct US Department of the Treasury, and the defunct Exchange Stabilization Fund, to the Judiciary’s OCPMMS. Any new currency printed after the ratification of Article XXVIII will have all Federal Reserve notations removed from it. The masonic symbolism (reverse side of the Great Seal on the One Dollar Bill) must also be removed. There is no logical reason for it to be included on any of our currency notes. Engravers might consider replacing it with a portrayal of the US Capitol Building.

The twelve Fed regional banks will also be nationalized, and occupied. Officers of Section 2 (above) will have the authority to arrest and detain anyone resisting the capture process. Detention will be for the duration of the transition period. Prisoners will be housed in low-risk facilities of participating states.

Under the direction of the OCPMMS, officers of the mint will secure and inventory all vaulted gold holdings in the twelve buildings with special emphasis on the New York Federal Reserve Building. Large cash hordes and unallocated gold or gold allocated to wealthy banking families or any of the institutions they control, including foreign central banks, shall, with the consent of the DRC’s oversight committee of the Revolution Congress (see Part Five, Item 16) be nationalized and transferred to the Judiciary’s OCPMMS’ Captured Cash Account or Captured Precious Metals Account.

Officers of the Mint will have the authority to arrest and detain anyone resisting the capture process. Detention will be for the duration of the transition period. Prisoners will be housed in low-risk facilities of participating states.

The twelve Federal Reserve regional banks, including their branch banks, are cut loose from the Fed. Each regional bank will become an independent, not-for-profit enterprise, confined to their district as before, and owned and operated by the retail banks that use them. Legal documents (Deed for New Ownership of Regional Clearing and Assistance Bank) will be provided from the Revolution Congress’ Commission for Legal Support.

This office shall also be responsible for announcing the change of ownership via a legal document published in a newspaper local to each institution. New owners shall be charged the token price of one fiat dollar for the reassignment of ownership.

In several ways, the twelve regional banks will perform the same functions they performed for the Fed. Regional presidents should work toward that end.

The New York Fed Bank Building will be renamed, the New York Regional Clearing and Assistance Bank. The other Fed regional banks will be renamed in a similar manner.

 

Section 6. The Office of the Decommissioning and Dismantling of the Central Intelligence Agency

When a US government agency claims secrecy in most of its activities, as does the CIA, there is good reason for public alarm and outrage. It is galling to be forced to support an institution that refuses to tell us how it spends our hard earned money. It is especially true when there have been numerous and convincing exposés over the years describing how the CIA has engaged in extensive and numerous foreign interventions including the fomenting and financing social uprisings, interfering with elections, bribing public officials, and engaging in various warring and assassination activities. In the case of certain high crimes like assassinations, it is the practice of the CIA to destroy all paperwork and other items that could be used to incriminate the institution.

The CIA has proven itself a willing tool of tyrants and capable of the most heinous of crimes. It was complicit in the killing of President John F. Kennedy in the year 1963 (see References, Lists Two and Three), and it stood by and did nothing on 9/11, 2001 and thereafter, though it must have known the twin towers and building 7 were brought down by controlled demolition. It is, after all, the CIA. These treasonous and murderous acts must never be forgotten or forgiven. The CIA has forfeited its right to exist.

The CIA’s budget is a closely guarded secret, but it’s generally understood that it gets all the money it wants to carry on its nefarious activities from the US Treasury’s Exchange Stabilization Fund (see References, List Three).

The CIA must cease all activities as of the ratification of Article XXVIII. The DRC’s Office of Policing and Investigations will occupy, and secure the CIA headquarters in Langley, Virginia. If the Revolution is to degenerate into armed conflict, this is where it might happen. The best of negotiating techniques must be put to use and the policing and investigations officers must be unarmed. Hopefully, the men and women at Langley will see the writing on the wall and yield.

Officers of Section 2 (above) will have the authority to arrest and detain anyone resisting the reform process. Detention will be for the duration of the transition period. Prisoners will be housed in high-risk facilities of participating states.

The financial records of the CIA, what there are of them, will be audited and its structure analyzed. All information will be released to the public. Citizens have a right to know about the evil activities secret institutions like the CIA will always engage in if they are not closely regulated and held in check by financial constraints.

Employees of this DRC office will be responsible for the following:

1. CIA employees engaged in overtly criminal activities will be delivered, together with evidence, to the Judiciary’s Bureau of Truth and Reconciliation for processing.

2. All drone warfare aircraft, equipment, and personnel will be called home from abroad. The entire drone program will be transferred to the US Air Force to be operated as a special division. It will be open to scrutiny by the US Congress. Just because we have drones doesn’t mean we have to use them.

3. All ground warfare capabilities stationed abroad will be called home. The entire ground warfare program will be transferred to the US Army to be operated as a special division. It will be open to scrutiny by the US Congress.

4. All other clandestine operations devoted to spying or interfering in the affairs of other nations shall be terminated and dismantled.

5. All so-called War on Drugs operations shall be terminated and dismantled. It is grossly immoral for the US to wage its war on drugs on the soil of other sovereign nations.

6. What is left of the CIA will be blended into the Legislative Branch’s Department of Intelligence where all work will be carefully monitored and constrained.

 

Section 7. The Office of the Decommissioning and Dismantling of the National Security Agency

The NSA is another agency with a secret budget and a vague mission and organization tree. Democracy and freedom are at risk when secretive agencies like the NSA are able to go about their business free of all links to legislative oversight and hence to voter scrutiny. Unless voters are ready and willing to surrender their privacy and freedom to this draconian institution they should wholeheartedly support the work of this office in taming it.

Like the CIA, the NSA was an obedient bystander in the year 1963 while the nation was fed the myth that Lee Harvey Oswald murdered President John Kennedy. Like the CIA, it made no pronouncements when the nation was fed the false story that the 9/11/2001 buildings were brought down by crashing airplanes and the ensuing fires. Citizens have every reason to fear and loath this institution.

The NSA must cease all activities as of the ratification of Article XXVIII. The DRC’s Office of Policing and Investigations will occupy, and secure the following NSA buildings and campuses and any others that may exist:

1. Headquarters Building, Ft. Meade, Maryland

2. Data Center, Bluffdale, Utah

3. Cryptologic Center, San Antonio, Texas

4. Cryptologic Operations Center, Augusta, Georgia

5. Aerospace Data Facility, Aurora, Colorado

6. Multi-program Computational Data Center, Oak Ridge, Tennessee

 

The policing and investigations officers will be unarmed. Hopefully, the security personnel at each of these stations will yield. The financial records of each of these buildings and campuses will be audited and their structural trees analyzed. All information will be released to the public. Loud objections will be ignored. Citizens have a right to know of the insidious work of this monstrous institution.

Employees of this DRC office will be responsible for the following:

1. NSA employees engaged in overtly criminal activities will be delivered, together with evidence, to the Judiciary’s Bureau of Truth and Reconciliation for processing.

2. All clandestine operations devoted to spying and/or interfering in the affairs of other nations shall be terminated and dismantled.

3. All clandestine operations devoted to the wholesale spying and/or interfering in the affairs of domestic citizens shall be terminated and dismantled.

4. The new director, chosen by the Judiciary’s Office of Appointments, will work with the previous director and staff to downsize the NSA and prepare it for a much leaner future.

5. What is left of the NSA will be blended into the structure of the Legislature’s Department of the Federal Bureau of Investigation, where its work will be carefully monitored and restrained.

 

Officers of Section 2 (above) will have the authority to arrest and detain anyone resisting the restructuring process. Detention will be for the duration of the transition period. Prisoners will be housed in high-risk facilities of participating states.

There are a dozen or more additional intelligence agencies operating in the US, but the CIA and the NSA are the most insidious and consume most of our intelligence dollars. In the new era where the government cannot print currency or accumulate debt, the remaining agencies will be starved of funds until they die or until they are downsized to the point where they can be sustained by beleaguered taxpayers.

For the remaining sections, officers of Section 2 (above) will have the authority to arrest and detain anyone resisting the work of the DRC. Detention will be for the duration of the transition period. Prisoners will be housed in low-risk facilities of participating states.

 

Section 8. The Office of the Transformation of all Depository Institutions

It is instructional to review why fractional reserve banks are so prone to despair of an economic downturn. The first reason is the most obvious. For most of banking history, banks have operated under the fractional reserve concept. This means that, since depositors are not likely to appear all at once to demand full withdrawal of their deposits, banks need only keep a reserve fund, plus a cushion for bad debts, etc. adequate for normal operations. With the advent of central banking, the reserve fund can be minimized even more since the central bank can be relied upon for loans (money fresh off the printing press) in case of trouble.

The second reason grows out of the first. While depositors see their deposited money as secured property, the bankers see deposited money as a loan they are duty-bound to invest to produce income for their depositors, huge profits for themselves, and to maintain gleaming bank buildings designed leave depositors spellbound and pacified. It is not hard to see how bank owners can become very wealthy. A tremendous leverage is at work, and the money used to generate their wealth belongs to someone else.

However, with a sudden downturn in the equity and bond markets, things can go awry in a hurry. Buyers disappear and investments made by the bankers cannot be sold—even cheaply. There is a sudden and massive shortfall of cash. When large numbers of frightened depositors show up to withdraw their deposits, the institutions have no choice but to close their doors.

Though with the ratification of Article XXVIII will outlaw fractional reserve banking, it is not enough.

All depository institutions, including the largest of investment and commercial banks, shall be restructured to conform to the credit union model. They will become depositor owned, fee based, state confined in the case of retail banks, and not-for-profit institutions

The mega-wealthy banking families of the world will be locked out of ownership and control without compensation. Nor will they be allowed to introduce any new type of currency or credit into the US banking sector to keep any of the banks open and operating. This is a drastic measure, but it is the only way the stranglehold the mega-wealthy have on the nation’s financial and political institutions can be effectively and permanently broken.

With their enormous wealth, they are able to buy governments and operate nations from behind the scenes, as they are doing here in the US They buy up mass media enterprises and use them to mold public opinion to their own liking. They promote black-flag events like 9/11/2001, wars for profit, and are ultimately seeking world domination and the enslavement of all common people.

They are currently promoting a fiat cashless market system, which they would own, and whereby all transactions will be computerized and all shoppers will be required to use debit cards to pay for everything they buy. The use of gold as money will not be permitted. The mega-wealthy will be in total control of everyone’s money. Everyone’s whereabouts and spending habits will be available to them, right down to the last detail. If they don’t like the way people spend their money, they will simply block the offending transactions.

Is it not time for brave and honorable citizens to band together and put an end to their mad dreams of World Empire?

There are other good reasons for making the above transformations. For example:

1. Free of relentless money printing, debt, and the high leverage of the fractional reserve concept, all financial institutions will be far more stable, albeit working at a lower intensity, and better able to weather occasional economic storms. Additionally, it is reasonable to expect the general economy will also be more stable.

2. Locally elected presidents and board members will be familiar to depositors; will earn reasonable salaries set by depositor/owners and, free of the corruption of big money, will more likely be able stewards of the institutions they are charged with managing.

3. Not-for-profit means benefits are evenly divided between depositors, borrowers, and managers, and taxes are minimal. Depositors receive market driven interest rates less fees; borrowers pay fees and interest to obtain the money they need, and employees find security in honest employment. There are no distant outsiders to share income with.

4. Depositors will fully control their accounts. Through Certificate of Deposit purchases, they will determine how much of their money will be surrendered for the institution to invest, as well as how it will be invested. They will always have a complete and honest account of where their money is.

 

With upwards of a hundred thousand banks in the country this transformation will be a formidable undertaking. But when it’s complete, the banking system will be decentralized, the money will be backed by gold, depositor/owners will select the most trustworthy and skilled people they can find to manage each of their banks, and all citizens can rest assured they will never again experience a banking crisis capable of bringing down the entire nation.

The new depositor owned banks will act as brokers for savers who are ready to make a portion of their savings available to the loan market and those who are ready to borrow. Most savers are anxious to utilize the services of retail or commercial banks to save them the time and effort of finding those who would borrow. Savers also want to be relieved of the task of assuring the borrowers are reputable and qualified borrowers and will pay back their debt within the time frame allotted to them. They will happily pay the bank a fee for this service. Those who would borrow utilize the services of banks to save them the time and effort of finding those who are prepared to loan their saved funds for a given length of time and at a given interest rate.

Both investors and borrowers operate on the assumption that the bankers they do business with are honorable people who will serve them honestly and faithfully. When bankers accept money from savers who wish to invest, there is an inferred and solemn pledge that they will protect the money and dispense it wisely. When borrowers arrive on the scene to take possession of the saver’s money, they must do so with the same inferred and solemn pledge that they will return the loaned funds at some future date along with the agreed-upon interest. Savers must rely on the honesty of both bankers and borrowers. Trust and honesty on the part of all parties is necessary to make the system work.

The new banks shall keep a portion of the interest paid by borrowers, so they may cover expenses, create a reserve fund for building maintenance and infrastructure taxes, etc., and weather an occasional bad debt. The banks will then credit the remainder of the interest to the investor accounts.

The sale of loans or mortgages by a lending bank will not be allowed except as part of the liquidation process whereupon a bank ceases to exist. This rule will ensure that banks give proper consideration to the viability and risk of loans.

Retail banks should stay away from high risk loans. High risk loans should be left to the larger investment and commercial banks.

Investors must maintain an understanding that the banks can never guaranty borrowers will always be able to repay their debts. Loses will sometimes be suffered. Depositors beware!

 

This office will inform depositors of all branch-level depository institutions (retail banks), that they must do the following:

Depositors of each branch level depository institution (less five branch banks per state selected by each master bank—see the next heading below) must band together and form a legal association. They must designate a chairperson, vice chair, and secretary, etc.

A legal document, entitled Deed for New Ownership of Failed and/or Closed Depository Institution, will be supplied by the Commission for Legal Support (Revolution Congress) and must be filled out by the association. The document will accurately describe the association of depositors and the name and location of the institution. Each association must also supply a new name for their institution that will reflect the surrounding locale. The new name will isolate the institution from the pre-revolution owners.

Upon receiving the above document from the depositors association, this office shall nationalize and close the institution in question, without compensation to owners or other claimants, and immediately request the local police department to secure the institution in question and prevent it from being looted of paperwork, cash, precious metals and safety deposit box contents etc. Notice of the nationalization, seizure, and closing will be sent to all of the important news services.

Ownership of the re-named institution will pass to its depositors of record the business day after the nationalization subject to the following: Owners must be US citizens residing in the US or, in the case of institutions, headquartered in the US, and foreign ownership of any kind is disallowed as is secret or obscure ownership, or any type of ownership that is designed to circumvent these rules.

This office shall also be responsible for announcing the change of ownership via a legal document published in a newspaper local to the institution. New owners shall be charged the token price of one fiat dollar for the reassignment of ownership.

Officers of Section 2 (above) will have the authority to arrest and detain anyone resisting the capture process. Detention will be for the duration of the transition period. Prisoners will be housed in low-risk facilities of participating states. The same will hold true for the major depository institutions (see below).

Said institution shall remain closed until the new owners are prepared to assume control. As quickly as possible, the new owners will meet to elect new presidents and board members, with the option of retaining the old ones. Each new owner must offer proof of deposit, citizenship, and legal residence. Institutional depositors must offer the equivalent. Each depositor shall be authorized a single vote.

Before reopening, each institution will be audited and the audit will be made public. As the true status of the bank emerges, the presiding officers will have to determine if it is possible to convert the failed bank into a successful fee based, depositor owned, and not-for-profit enterprise. It should be anticipated that business and personal cash accounts (not investments) diminished as a consequence of the collapse of fractional reserve banking will be restored through use of the OCPMMS’ Captured Cash Account and the Bureau of Engraving and Printing.

If the decision is negative, an option would be for the new owners to seek to merge with another nearby and similar bank to achieve viability. If that can be done, well and good. If it cannot be done, the bank will have to be permanently closed. Of course, safety deposit box owners must have the opportunity to reclaim the contents of their boxes. The banks can then be sold piecemeal. Beyond the cost of selling the property, the claims of depositors will be given the highest priority.

If there is a good chance viability can be achieved, it will then be up to the new president and board of directors to purge their institution of all criminal and unethical conduct. Henceforth, one hundred percent of each depositor’s money must be accounted for by the institution and to the satisfaction of each depositor. All expenses must be recovered via straight forward fees.

The new owners must also decide what percentage of depositor’s money can be salvaged and made available to them. Undesignated cash funds found in the bank vaults, beyond what is needed to operate the bank, will be used for that purpose. Presidents may appeal to the Judiciary’s OCPMMS for help in covering shortfalls to business and personal cash accounts. Funds provided will come from the OCPMMS’ Captured Cash Account.

Retail banks are closest to the common consumer. They offer such things as checking accounts, banking by mail, safety deposit boxes, and debit cards. In proportion with depositor’s willingness to provide cash through the purchase of Certificates of Deposits, retail banks will also offer such things as mortgages, home loans for repairs and expansions, auto loans and personal loans etc. Component parts of CDs must be available to investors. Banks shall be free to set the terms for the CD’s. In the case of an economic downturn, CD owners must be prepared to accept loses.

Warehoused money or goods held in safety deposit boxes must never be used by the banks for any purpose. Warehoused cash and goods do not belong to the banks. They belong to depositors and must be one hundred percent available to all depositors should they come calling at the same time. Bank earnings will be from fees only

However, beyond a certain physical displacement or weight, or through legal proceedings, banks will have the right to inspect goods that are being warehoused to ensure their services are not being used for unlawful purposes. Depositors will be notified when this will happen, and will have the option of being present at the time of inspection, but they will not be permitted to make any withdrawals between the time of notification and the time of the inspection.

 

This office will inform depositors/investors (not pre-revolution owners) of failed and/or closed major depository institutions (investment and commercial banks) that they must do the following:

Depositors/investors of each major depository institution must band together and form a legal association. They must designate a chairperson, vice chair, and secretary, etc.

A legal document, entitled Deed for New Ownership of Failed and/or Closed Depository Institution, will be supplied by the Commission for Legal Support (Revolution Congress) and must be filled out by the association. The document will accurately describe the association of depositors/investors and the name and location of the failed institution. Each association must also supply a new name for their institution that will reflect the surrounding locale. The new name will isolate the institution from the pre-revolution owners.

Upon receiving the above document from the depositors/investors association, this office shall nationalize and close the institution in question without compensation to owners or other claimants, and immediately request the local police department to secure the institution in question and prevent it from being looted of paperwork, cash, precious metals and safety deposit box contents etc. Notice of the nationalization, seizure, and closing will be sent to all of the important news services.

Ownership of the re-named institution will pass to its depositors/investors of record as of the business day after the nationalization subject to the following: New owners must be US citizens residing in the US or, in the case of institutions, headquartered in the US, and foreign ownership of any kind is disallowed as is secret or obscure ownership, or any type of ownership that is designed to circumvent these rules.

This office shall also be responsible for announcing the change of ownership via a legal document published in a newspaper local to the institution. New owners shall be charged the token price of one fiat dollar, collectively, for the assignment of ownership.

Said institution shall remain closed until new owners are prepared to assume control. As quickly as possible, the new owners will meet to elect new presidents and board members, with the option of retaining the old ones. Each new owner must offer proof of deposit, citizenship, and legal residence. Institutional depositors must offer the equivalent. Each depositor shall be authorized a single vote.

Before reopening, each institution will be audited and the audit will be made public. Officers of the Mint will secure and inventory all vaulted gold holdings. Unallocated gold or gold allocated to wealthy banking families or any of the institution they control shall, with the consent of the DRC’s oversight committee of the Revolution Congress (see Part Five, Item 16) be nationalized and transferred to the Judiciary’s OCPMMS’ Captured Precious Metals Account.

As the true status of the bank emerges, the new presiding officers will have to determine if it is possible to convert the failed bank into a successful fee based and not-for-profit enterprise. Each major depository institution (investment or commercial bank) will be allowed to select and keep no more than five branch banks in any one state. The establishment of additional branch banks will be disallowed (no bank will be too big to fail).

It should be anticipated that business and personal cash accounts (not investments) diminished as a consequence of the collapse of fractional reserve banking will be restored through use of the OCPMMS’ Captured Cash Account and the Bureau of Engraving and Printing. Undesignated cash found in bank vaults, beyond what is needed to operate the bank, will be used for the same purpose.

Money printing, debt accumulation, central banking, fractional reserve banking, and wide-spread criminal activity, have fostered an exaggerated and bloated system of banking that cannot be sustained under the umbrella of an honest financial structure. With a large number of bankrupt clients, a drying up of depositor/investors, insufficient reserve funds, a collapsed derivative market, and the loss of hundreds or even thousands of branch banks, most of the large investment and commercial banks may have to be permanently closed.

An option would be for the new owners to seek to merge with another similar bank to achieve viability. If that can be done, well and good. The five branch banks per state rule will still apply to the new merged bank. If it cannot be done, the bank will have to be closed and all property sold. Of course, safety deposit box owners will be granted the opportunity to reclaim the contents of their boxes before the sale. Beyond the cost of selling the property, the claims of depositor/investors will be given the highest priority.

If there is a good chance viability can be achieved, it will be up to the new president and board of directors to purge their institution of all criminal and unethical conduct. In the case of the huge investment and commercial banks, cleansing will be a formidable task. No doubt a host of illegal and unethical activities will have to be terminated. From algorithmic computerized trading to naked short selling, short selling on the downtick, moving markets to secure profits, using depositor’s money to secure profits for the bank, and fractional reserve activity—all such practices must end.

Henceforth, one hundred percent of each depositor’s money must be accounted for by the institution to the satisfaction of each depositor. All expenses must be recovered via straight forward fees.

It is possible that major US banks have accumulated trillions of dollars in Federal Reserve notes in anticipation of the collapse and will be able to remain open and fully functional amid the turmoil of the collapse. However, that will not save them from being nationalized and closed. Federal Reserve currency is now government currency and any currency held in the vaults of the big banks will be managed by the new depositor/owners. It will be the duty of the new depositor/owners to make sure any currency or precious metals not needed to maintain and operate the bank and restore business and personal cash accounts, will be surrendered to Officers of the Mint who will in turn deposit them into the OCPMMS’ Captured Cash Account or Precious Metals Account. Pre revolution owners will not be compensated.

With the dismantling of the Federal Reserve and the collapse of fractional reserve banking the question arises: How can the financial system best be primed for recovery? The following items are manifest and will be followed as a recipe for recovery.

1. Business and personal cash accounts (not investments) diminished as a consequence of the collapse of fractional reserve banking will be restored through use of the OCPMMS’ Captured Cash Account and the Bureau of Engraving and Printing.

2. Call in US fiat currency from abroad with promises to deliver a certain quantity of gold at a certain future date and at market prices. Proceeds to be deposited in the OCPMMS’ Captured Cash Account

3. US territory gold mining companies to sell output to the OCPMMS at market prices in exchange for 100% gold-backed and fully redeemable currency to start the flow into that currency (for use in the US only); said currency to be deposited in US depositor owned banks only.

4. Citizens may sell their gold at market prices to the OCPMMS in exchange for 100% gold-backed and fully redeemable currency (for use in the US only and in units that are convenient to use—see Part Two, Chapter Two, Section 4).

 

From the date of the sale to new owners forward, all US depository institutions, restructured as above, shall be forever locally owned and operated by depositors on a not-for-profit basis and in compliance with the state laws in which they are located These requirements, together with the conversion of federal reserve currency to government currency, and the new election requirements (see Chapter Two, Section 9), will break the stranglehold the mega-wealthy globalist banking families have on US depository institutions and the federal governing structure.

Locally owned and operated, the new not-for-profit depository institutions will be free to serve their depositors with honesty and integrity, and unburdened by the nefarious influences of the fractional reserve concept, debt, currency and credit creation, manipulated interest rates, the corruption of derivatives, and the bleeding off of profits by kleptomaniac owners.

Except for infrastructure, not-for-profit depository institutions shall not be taxed, either at the federal or local level.

 

Section 9. The Office of the Decommissioning and Dismantling of the Credit Card Industry (To Be Replaced by Debit Cards)

Un-payed credit constitutes an increase in the money supply that will distort values and produce an exaggerated prosperity that the future will not support. Un-payed credit is best seen as a method of extracting wealth from the future in order that it may be enjoyed today.

There is no doubt that many financially established people enjoy using credit cards. The cards make possible easy day-to-day credit purchases without the nuisance of cash, and which can be settled with a single payment at the end of the month usually without penalty.

But for many living at the financial margins, credit cards are a temptation that will set the stage for future setbacks that may take years to recover from. Minimum and late payments are penalized with high interest rates, and what is owed each month may quickly escalate beyond the ability of certain people to pay.

There are several ways individuals can live beyond their means, ranging from borrowing from friends and relatives to resorting to theft and swindle. The credit card is surely among the easiest, and while it may upset many people to be deprived of the convenience the cards offer, it is best for society at large, and especially for those at the low end of the economic ladder, if this temptation is absent from the scene.

Debit cards offer the same convenience with the exception that there may be a small fee for each use, and the wealth must to be in place before it is used (see Part Two, Chapter Four, Section 4). People living at the margins must not feel offended by this reform. It is best for them to face their situation early on, and work to improve it, rather than being ensnared later when recovery will be all the more difficult.

With the country in the throes of a great depression, it would be an unjust inconsistency to allow the government to repudiate its debt without allowing certain debt adjustments within the private sector as well. It is the duty of this office to oversee the termination of credit card usage and the forgiveness of all credit card debt as of the ratification of Article XXVIII.

Officers of Section 2 (above) will have the authority to arrest and detain anyone resisting the reform process. Detention will be for the duration of the transition period. Prisoners will be housed in low-risk facilities of participating states.

 

Section 10. The Office of the Decommissioning and Dismantling of the Student Loan Program

As in the previous section, with the country in the throes of a great depression, it would be an unjust inconsistency to allow the government to repudiate its debt without allowing certain debt adjustments within the private sector as well. It is the duty of this office to oversee the termination of the Student Loan Program and the forgiveness of all student loan debt as of the ratification of Article XXVIII.

Officers of Section 2 (above) will have the authority to arrest and detain anyone resisting the capture process. Detention will be for the duration of the transition period. Prisoners will be housed in low-risk facilities of participating states.

 

Section 11. The Office of the Restructuring of the Health Care Insurance Industry

This office shall oversee the restructuring of the health care insurance industry. As of the ratification of Article XXVIII, all health care insurance companies shall be owned by their customers and operated on a not-for-profit basis.

This office shall follow the same general procedures as listed above to accomplish this mission. Insurance companies already operating on a not-for-profit basis will not be affected by the change of ownership process.

The sticky issues of pre-existing conditions and when to let gravely ill or old people die will have to be ironed out. Practicality must rule over the emotional responses of consumers and loved ones. As with any not-for-profit institution, income must equal payments plus expenses and a fee to sustain a moderate exigency fund.

Gravely ill old people or others burdened by serious preexisting conditions must not claim they have a “right” to be relieved of the cost for their treatments. No one has a “right” to a part of someone else’s wealth and income (see Part Two, Chapter Three, Section 8). It may be up to philanthropic foundations and volunteers to come to the aid of those who are not well served by a marketplace oriented health care industry. That is one of their proper functions.

Officers of Section 2 (above) will have the authority to arrest and detain anyone resisting the reform process. Detention will be for the duration of the transition period. Prisoners will be housed in low-risk facilities of participating states.

 

Section 12. The Office of the Decriminalization of the US Mass Media (Rescue from a Nefarious and Control Seeking Elite)

The evil intent of the mega-wealthy banking elite is revealed most glaringly in their ownership and control of the US mass media. Through it, and their equally powerful influence in the US government, they have successfully propagated and continue to propagate enormous lies, fake and diversionary news, and have generally conspired to deny citizens the information they need to fully and truly understand what is going on in their own country and around the world.

Due to the convoluted, multi-level, and deeply entrenched ownership of the US mass media it would be futile for this office to attempt to reform the media via revolutionary decrees. The best approach is through the legal system.

This office will sponsor citizen class-action lawsuits directed at all of the popular national television newscasters, all of the national news network directors and board members and, finally, the owners of said networks. The focus will not be to win awards. The focus will be to put people behind bars. The lawsuits will be backed by the full authority of the revolution, and trials will be held deep in the hinterland.

Some of the charges—prohibiting the report, or failing to report that:

1. The United States is a bankrupt nation.

2. The Federal Reserve is a criminal institution.

3. Printing money is a crime.

4. Debt accumulation without limit is a crime against the unborn.

5. Manipulating interest rates is a crime.

6. The fractional reserve banking system is a system of legalized swindle.

7. The 9/11/2001 event was a grand theatrical production produced and directed by the governments of Israel and the United States, and certain moneyed and military interests. Its main purpose was to provide an excuse for the US to move into the middle-east in a big military way so we could control that part of the world. Its second purpose was to protect Israel so it could continue to steal land from the Palestinians. A third purpose was to make certain people a lot of money.

8. Lee Harvey Oswald did not kill President John Kennedy in the year 1963. The killing was orchestrated by the CIA and accomplished by Chicago mafia assassins.

9. The Exchange Stabilization Fund is a criminal institution.

10. The CIA is a criminal institution.

11. The NSA is a criminal institution.

12. Our understanding of politics is not well founded. Where is political bedrock?

13. The mega-wealthy banking families have brought ruin upon the world.

14. Our wars are not defensive wars. They are offensive wars. They are waged to provide jobs to soldiers, to cow other nations into doing our bidding, to dollarize other nations so the consequences of our dollar printing is more spread out and defused, to enrich bankers and defense contractors, and to prevent other nations from competing with our military power.

15. The US is the world’s leading producer and seller of killing machines.

 

The above media crimes have deeply injured the nation, perhaps mortally. Tens of millions will die as a result. Those responsible should not go unpunished.

In future times such lawsuits as above will be processed through the Judiciary’s Bureau of Litigation. However, since it may not yet be functional, this office will provide the prosecutions that are needed.

 

Section 13. The Office of Receivership of the Department of Defense

Employees of this DRC office will work with the new director, chosen by the Judiciary’s Office of Appointments, and the previous director and staff to downsize the Department of Defense and prepare it for a much leaner future.

This office will terminate all of our wars, and bring home all of our nuclear warheads as quickly as possible. The number of bases the US may maintain abroad will not exceed the number of foreign bases maintained by the next most powerful nation and no foreign base will be maintained where it is not wanted. All other military hardware and personnel, including civilian contractors, will be brought home.

The new military chain of command will be as described in Part Four, Chapter Three, Section 3.

Citizens and military personnel alike must recognize the best way to fight so-called terrorism is by addressing the hatred from which it springs.

The work of the DRC will transform US foreign and military policies from war-oriented to peace-oriented, rein in the military and abandon the policy of world domination. No other nation has ever agreed that the United States should rule the world. Henceforth, the US will recognize all other nations as equals and use non-military means to work with them to achieve world peace and prosperity for all.

What is left of the Department of Defense will be blended into the legislature’s Department of the Armed Forces.

 

There are hundreds of additional agencies and sub-agencies, etc. scattered throughout the governing structure. In the new era where the government cannot print currency or accumulate debt, the remaining agencies will be starved of funds until they die or until they are downsized to the point where they can be sustained by beleaguered taxpayers. Everyone will have to learn to live in the real world.

Agencies such as the Commodity Futures Trading Commission, the Federal Trade Commission, and the Securities and Exchange Commission, have been ineffective for decades. They were designed to fight unethical conduct as their titles infer. They were not designed and had no defense against corrupted institutions and individuals higher up in the bureaucratic structure, such as the Fed and its lackey banks, US presidents and members of congress. These agencies, and others, will be transferred en masse to the Judiciary’s Moral Council where they will be reinvigorated, perhaps under different names, and provided with the authority to perform their jobs properly.

Under the new paradigm the pathways to corruption will be far more visible than they have been in years past, and the demands made of regulatory agencies should fall dramatically.

 

Section 14. Conclusion

While the preceding paragraphs doubtless oversimplify what must be done, they do demonstrate the boldness that is required. Draconian measures will be needed to get the work done quickly to minimize suffering and the possibility that the nation may descend into anarchy. If the nation can survive the several months it will take for the new system of money and governance to take hold, the economy will begin to hum once again. On the positive side, a great lesson will have been learned; citizens must never loan money to their central government, except under the direst of circumstances. Even then, the payback schedule must be ironclad.

Citizens must be aware that as the currency-creating mechanisms and other corrupt practices are dismantled, interest rates will assume their market value. Undoubtedly, they will go sharply higher, precipitating innumerable business and personal failures. The fiat currency relative to gold, and everything denominated in the old fiat currency, will also depreciate sharply, precipitating more loses. The federal debt will be repudiated and most so-called entitlement programs dismantled. Large scale unemployment, hardship, homelessness, hunger, and fear will grip the nation. Many people will be rendered destitute by these actions. Many will die of starvation and exposure to the elements, but it cannot be helped. If the system is allowed to continue operating without reform, they will be rendered destitute anyway. The ruin must be accepted. It is a price that must be paid for the corruption and stupidities of the past. People will have to care for each other as best they can. Regardless of the suffering, economic reality must be allowed to reassert itself. It will provide the best possible foundation for a new prosperity based on reality, truth, the Universal and Unifying Morality, honest government, honest money, and honest voters.

Many people will cry out, “Why should we support a reorganization plan that will throw us into a state of extreme hardship?” The answer is clear. If the necessary changes are not instituted, the suffering will be even more intense and longer lasting. This way, a remedial plan is available to make things better. The other way, plans driven by events will only make matters worse, and people will find themselves in a state of long-term bondage, desperation, and tyranny.

Others will say that government repudiation of its debt and other obligations is a grossly dishonorable thing to do and that such acts will stain the reputation of the nation for as long as it exists. The dishonor, however, has already occurred in the previous decades. It only needs to be faced up to today. The dishonor occurred when the nation accumulated debt beyond its ability or intent to pay back, and placed it on the backs of children and generations of children as yet unborn. The dishonor occurred when the nation printed currency without any qualms about the way it defrauded savers and distorted economic calculation. The dishonor occurred when citizens allowed their government to devolve into a system based on the buying and selling of votes. The dishonor occurred when the otherwise intelligent citizens failed to school themselves in the tenets of the true morality, true economics, and true politics, and therefore had no defense against the corrupt and antiquated ideologies that pushed them and their country into ruin. The question to be asked is: how best can the nation turn away from dishonor, and start acting honorably once again?

Despite the horrendous and deadly difficulties, citizens will do well to support the work of the Decriminalizing and Restructuring Commission wholeheartedly. Assuming the right kind of preparation and support, it will offer the best chance for a return to prosperity and honest government.

 

Back to Top

 

 

****

 

 

Chapter Eight

The Restructured Judiciary

 

Section 1. The Supreme Court

The post revolution Supreme Court will be the supreme lawful guardian of the revised Constitution, and where the constitution fails to provide, the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth, the Universal and Unifying Morality, and the concept of government as a component of the division of labor. The authority of the Judicial Branch shall stand above all other branches and institutions of government including the military and central government policing or security institutions. It shall stand as an inviolate bulwark against criminal or unethical behavior by all citizens, whether in or out of government and regardless of their wealth or status.

The Judicial Branch shall consist of the Supreme Court, and two subsidiary councils, which shall be called the Moral Council and the Administrative Council. The Moral and Administrative Councils will, in turn, have a number of subsidiary bureaus and offices.

The court shall consist of nine judges, each of whom has been nominated and elected to his or her position by lesser federal court judges scattered throughout the nation. The purpose of isolating the Supreme Court and its two councils and subsidiaries from the executive branch is to prevent the corruption of the Judiciary by politically motivated presidents and legislators. As a category of people, lesser federal court judges scattered throughout the nation will be best able to maintain a proper moral compass, even in the face of social or natural storms. Henceforth, the Judicial Conference of the United States will be responsible for nominating and electing Supreme Court replacement judges.

Supreme Court judges must be the best of the best. They must be highly educated in law and morality, excellent speakers and writers, respected by their peers, and possess impeccable credentials and considerable experience. They must be a product of the judicial profession and free of false moral, economic or political doctrines.

Supreme Court judgeships should be considered working lifetime assignments. However, in the interests of maintaining a vibrant court, judges should not serve beyond their seventy-fifth year. Judges should have the good sense to leave the court if their reputation or ability to perform comes into question.

The court shall control its own docket. It shall pass judgment on the legitimacy of the laws passed by congress and by lesser state, provincial, or city governments. In response to petitions, it shall have the authority to investigate and prosecute, via the moral council, all people regardless of their wealth or position, who violate accepted standards of moral behavior thereby inflicting harm upon others or the nation. The court will establish precedents that can be utilized in future lower court proceedings.

It shall serve as the appeals court of last resort for decisions handed down by lesser courts, and may be petitioned by lower courts to change existing laws that litigants feel violate the revised constitution, the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth, the Universal and Unifying Morality, or the concept of government as a component of the division of labor. It shall also pass judgment on any differences between the judgments of the two councils and the Executive or Legislative Branches.

The Supreme Court shall take care that neither it nor any of its subsidiaries shall initiate any practice that would usurp onto any level of government responsibilities that nominally and morally belong to the individual. The consequences of bad choices on the part of individuals must not be socialized as a result of judicial action. Legislation designed to assist individuals who find themselves in difficulty, if such legislation is to be initiated, is the responsibility of the Legislative Branch.

In normal times the Supreme Court shall act as a conduit for the work assignments of its two councils. All work assignments must be endorsed by the Supreme Court. The assignments may be specific or general. The Supreme Court shall work closely with its two councils and constantly monitor what they are doing. The Supreme Court shall also have the authority to remove from office, for just cause, one member from each of its two councils in each calendar year.

During the early days of the transition period, the length of which will be determined by the Revolution Congress, the Moral and Administrative Councils and their subsidiary bureaus and offices will be organized, staffed, and supervised by a committee of the Revolution Congress.

During the transition period, the committee will be in charge. The committee will be busy organizing the expanded Judiciary, assigning duties, and supervising the two councils and their many bureaus and offices. They must be free to do their work without interference from the Supreme Court.

 

Section 2. The Moral Council

The Moral Council shall act as the regulatory, litigious, policing, and investigations arm of the Supreme Court and shall be subservient to it. It shall be charged with preserving the integrity of the nation’s government, the nation’s elections and voting practices, its military and policing institutions, its mass media including the internet, and its public, private, financial, and charitable business institutions.

It will enable both domestic and foreign citizens to seek redress from the rich and powerful, and others who believe their positions render them exempt from the rules of behavior everyone else is expected to observe. It shall serve, in a sense, as an empowered national and international ombudsman.

The Moral Council shall consist of a single judge, three lawyers of long and broad experience, and three accountants of similar experience. Six members will constitute a quorum, except that the judge must always be present. The single judge shall come from the ranks of the Supreme Court and shall be elected to his or her position by a majority of the remaining members of the Supreme Court. Moral Council judgeships should be considered working lifetime assignments. However, in the interests of maintaining a vibrant moral council, judges should not serve beyond their seventy-fifth year. In addition, judges should have the good sense to leave the council if their reputation or ability to perform comes into question. Moral Council judges must also be the best of the best and possess the same requirements as Supreme Court judges. The single judge shall serve as the Chairperson of the Moral Council.

The lawyers and accountants will be named and assigned to their posts by the Supreme Court. As in the case of judges, they must be the best of the best. Their assignments should be considered working lifetime assignments. However, in the interests of maintaining a vibrant Moral Council, none should serve beyond their seventy-fifth year. By five or more votes, Moral Council members shall have the authority to unseat one of their members in each calendar year for misconduct or inability to perform. The lawyers must be well schooled in the Universal and Unifying Morality, constitutional law, and must be noteworthy writers and speakers. The accountants must be well schooled in all aspects of business accounting and able to decipher the most convoluted of banking and business practices. They, too, must be noteworthy writers and speakers. The Moral Council shall monitor and guide the work of its subsidiary offices and keep the Supreme Court fully informed of all aspects of its work.

The Revolution Congress’ Committee to Organize, Staff, and Oversee the Transformation and Operation of the Judiciary shall be responsible for the initial staffing of the Moral Council and all of its subsidiary bureaus and offices. As the work of the Revolution Congress winds down, the responsibility of staffing the Moral Council will fall to the Supreme Court.

Post Revolution, the Moral Council shall oversee and provide quality directors for six subdivisions. They are: the Bureau of Policing and Investigations, the Bureau of Truth and Reconciliation, the Bureau of Sentencing Standards, the Bureau of US Sovereignty, the Bureau of Regulation, and the Bureau of Litigation. Directors shall be responsible for the proper staffing of their respective bureaus and offices.

 

Section 3. The Judicial Bureau of Policing and Investigations

The Supreme Court shall employ and maintain an adequate police and investigative force to provide revolutionary and post-revolutionary law enforcement for the Moral and Administrative Councils and their subsidiary bureaus and offices. It shall be called the Judicial Bureau of Policing and Investigations and shall be managed by the Moral Council.

The subsidiary bureaus and offices of the Moral and Administrative Councils will draw on this force as needed. Experience will dictate the size of this force and how it will be used.

During the transition period, the bureau will also maintain two major branch offices. The first will be assigned to the DRC and the second to the Revolution Congress.

A committee of the Revolution Congress will initially staff this bureau with several hundred experienced officers and investigators drawn from police departments of participating states. It will also select the leadership of the bureau and its two principle branch offices. The bureau will evolve into a permanent institution of the judicial branch. Personnel will initially be supported by their respective states but as the expanded Judiciary becomes operational it, through the Moral Council, will become responsible for the sustenance of this bureau.

Staff members will have a blanket power to arrest and detain those resisting revolutionary changes but, during the transition period, will not carry arms—this in keeping with the peaceful intent of the revolution. Those detained will be housed in prisons of participating states. Post revolution officers will be armed at the discretion of the Supreme Court.

As the Revolution Congress nears the completion of its work, many staff members will depart for home. New hires will be at the discretion of the Moral Council.

 

Section 4. The Judicial Bureau of Truth and Reconciliation

The truth and reconciliation concept is not new. It has been used a number of times in history with varying degrees of success, most notably in South Africa in the mid to late 1990’s. It was instrumental in helping that nation emerge from the scourge of apartheid without a major blood bath, much to the amazement and relief of the rest of the world.

There are times when history is best served by truth rather than vengeance. A written record, freely attested to by the acting perpetrators, of how the most cruel and infamous of crimes can be assembled, committed, and sometimes covered up, can be far more valuable as a permanent historical lesson, than can a vengeance, sweet though it may be, that will be forgotten after a decade or two. Historians far into the future can utilize the resultant documents to teach readers the paths to avoid so the lives of those yet unborn may be more tranquil.

The mandate of this bureau will be to offer full and complete amnesty to those who will offer a truthful and thorough account of their role in the ruin of our nation.

 

Section 5. The Judicial Bureau of Sentencing Standards

The Supreme Court acting through the Moral Council shall be responsible for compiling and publishing a detailed schedule of punishments that can be referenced, but not necessarily followed to the letter, by judges who must impose sentences upon those who have been found guilty of a crime. Standardization is important so justice may be applied equally throughout the land. The schedule of punishments may be revised by experience and must always be closely scrutinized by the Supreme Court. Punishments will include, but not be limited to: admonishment, monetary fine, removal from office, banishment from an occupation, corporal punishment including execution, imprisonment, probation, or a combination thereof. The schedule must be a matter of public record.

Item 1. For those owners and employees of the mass media industry found guilty of gross moral negligence:

For owners of major news networks—10 years imprisonment

For presidents, directors, and board members, etc. of major news networks—7 years imprisonment

For newscasters and writers—2 years Imprisonment

 

Section 6. The Judicial Bureau of US Sovereignty

In anticipation of the collapse of the irredeemable paper money and unpayable debt financial system the mega-wealthy banking families of the world have bequeathed to us, they are seeking to convert their doomed paper money into tangible assets that will retain value after the collapse, including such things as land, buildings, bridges, roadways, railroads, airports, and manufacturing plants, etc.

It is the duty of this bureau to discover and energetically and forthrightly deny the purchase of US assets of any kind, whether directly or indirectly, by mega-wealthy banking families or industrialists.

If it is discovered after the fact (since the ratification of Article XXVIII) that such a sale has taken place, this bureau will have the authority to seize and nationalize the property without compensation to the owners, and then sell it to qualified (not owned by the mega-wealthy) US business interests at market value.

 

Section 7. The Judicial Bureau of Regulation

The Supreme Court shall employ and maintain a regulatory bureau that will assume the responsibility of regulating those linchpin sectors of the economy that have heretofore been poorly regulated due to skullduggery in the political process, or the vicissitudes and short learning curves of here today and gone tomorrow politicians. Linchpin regulatory structures will now be assembled by learned and experienced professionals who will also be devoted to the new paradigm. The new bureau shall be managed by the Moral Council.

This bureau will recognize the Universal and Unifying Morality, private property, private ownership of the means of production, honest money (gold), the free marketplace, the resultant price edifice, and honest economic calculation as the central driving forces for social advancement. It will regulate its assignments within that framework. The bureau will play no favorites, nor will it grant special privileges. Whereas the Bureau of Litigation (see Section 15, below) will deal with errant individuals, this bureau will deal with market economy business ethics to keep the US business community on the straight and narrow path of righteousness.

A host of issues and antagonisms, not necessarily illegal, will continually crop up and beg to be dealt with. Most such transgressions can be dealt with by bringing public opinion and the mass media to bear against the irresponsible parties. As always, time is an important ally. Generally, regulatory agents should stay aloof of small disputes and leave their solutions to private parties, save if the policing authority is needed to keep the peace. Over time, regulators will learn what to look for and where to draw the line.

Owners, administrators and board members of all US financial institutions must reside in the US. It is incumbent upon each of them to be aware of what is happening within the confines of their institutions. If it becomes evident administrators and board members are allowing their institution to engage in criminal or unethical conduct, they will be available for victims to take into court via the Bureau of Litigation.

If a foreign financial institution owner resides outside of the US and refuses to respond to a court summons issued by the Moral Council, the Supreme Court, using international protocol, will seek to have the person extradited to the US for prosecution. If all else fails, the Supreme Court will declare the institution in question an unwelcome business enterprise and force it to make amends with its depositors and leave the country.

When and where it is appropriate, this bureau will absorb already existing regulatory agencies such as the Securities and Exchange Commission, the Federal Trade Commission, and dozens other departments and agencies, etc., and place them in one of the following offices:

 

Section 8. The Office of Depository Institutions Regulation

(See Part Three, Chapter Two, Section 8)

It will be the duty of this office to keep the operations of all US depository institutions (banks) honest, understandable to customers and auditors alike, and consistent with the framework of the new paradigm.

 

Section 9. The Office of Brokerage Institutions Regulation

Equity trading should be straightforward and held to high standards of honesty and integrity. Stock ownership must be traceable and ownership readily and positively determined. Transit time between owners must be minimized and the process fully documented.

Algorithmic driven computerized trading is outlawed. So-called naked short selling is outlawed as is short selling to the downside. Short sellers must submit to the brokerage institution the location and identification numbers of the securities they are borrowing to sell short. Securities held in escrow accounts for investors must never be loaned out without permission of the owner(s) and without payment of an appropriate fee. Securities may never be loaned out to more than one party at a time.

Despite possible inconvenience, the equity and clearing markets must be forced to operate slowly enough so, at any given moment, accounting can keep up with transactions and everyone can understand where everything is and what is going on. Safeguards must be put in place to prevent automated trading from overwhelming the accounting system, creating phantom certificates or commodities, or influencing prices in order that owners may make a profit thereby.

Employees of this office will learn what to look for.

 

Section 10. The Office of Public, Private, Charitable and Not-for-Profit Institutions Regulation

Businesses are bound by the same moral considerations that guide the actions of individuals. Unfortunately, an unhampered marketplace will give rise to all sorts of criminal and immoral business practices. Though many privileges are inherent in private business ownership, the authority to wantonly ravage the earth’s land, waters, and air; the authority to turn out harmful or dangerous products; the authority to mislead or cheat customers; or the authority to wantonly disregard the health and safety of customers and employees are not among them.

Theft, fraud, a disregard for the life or welfare of workers, a disregard for consumers, and a disregard for the environment or the local ecology are all-too-common attributes of an unhampered marketplace. It is certainly within the purview of civil or criminal courts and all three branches of government to step in, when it becomes necessary, to make things right. Experience will dictate what laws are needed. Citizens not only have a right to honest government, they have a right to expect honesty, integrity, and responsibility, from the business community as well. Those at the top of corporations, both public and private, must never be trusted to keep themselves honest.

Regarding products that assail the physical and mental health of the citizenry on a grand scale, such as tobacco, drugs (including alcohol), gambling, and socially degrading, violent, or otherwise trashy entertainment, etc., it is wishful thinking that such things can be successfully and wholly removed from the marketplace. Armed, however, with the authority of the Moral Council and its subsidiary bureaus and offices, citizens can now seek redress against the worst of those who seek wealth or power by tearing away at the social fabric.

It will often happen that this office will not be working with absolutes in its prosecutions, and the outcome of its work may not contain absolutes. But, over time, minimal behavioral standards will evolve beyond which the purveyors of social decay will choose not to tread. They will know what the public is willing or unwilling to put up with. While not a perfect solution, it is, perhaps, the best that can be hoped for within the folds of a democratic and free society. Just as there is no such thing as perfect money, neither is there such a thing as a perfect moral system, a perfect government, or a perfect citizenry. Everyone must recognize the value of compromise, even when dealing with difficult people.

This office must be especially careful that it does not create lucrative markets for the criminal underground. It is not the business of government to be responsible for the destructive behavior of individuals, nor should it socialize the consequences of such behavior.

Special attention must be given to monopolies, no matter how skillfully they may be hidden, and the deleterious consequences they bring to the market place. A case in point is the mass media, including radio and TV stations, magazines and newspapers. In today’s world, the mega-wealthy own most of the media and are able to control what most people think about particular issues. As a consequence, our democracy is dying, our constitution has been trashed, our financial system lies in ruin, and war is in the offing with a nuclear armed world power.

Aside from the obvious task of managing and leading, those at the top of publicly traded or charitable businesses have an implicit moral covenant with shareholders and employees, as well as with the public at large. Employees depend on directors to keep the company viable and growing so the employees and their families can feel secure as they look forward. Shareholders depend on business leadership to protect shareholder risk capital and, hopefully, add to the value of the enterprise. The public at large wants to see businesses that are true to their purpose and respectful of all the lives they impact along the way.

There is no doubt it takes a great deal of skill and ingenuity to keep a business on the road to success within the context of a highly competitive environment. In return for their valuable services, directors and executives are entitled to a commensurate compensation. What directors and executives are not morally entitled to do is to use their positions of authority to engage in a wholesale looting of the business for their own inordinate gains. While there may be an ambiguous line between what is called reasonable compensation and what may be called looting, the amount of rage that issues from employees and shareholders, as well as public disgust and condemnation, will be a good measure of when the line has been crossed Compensation of company directors, in all of its forms, must be a matter of public record and never hidden from view. The Moral Council will provide a means for employees and shareholders to reach up and impose a discipline upon directors or executives who wander too far away from their moral responsibilities and constraints.

Publicly owned companies must be mindful of the way their ownership certificates are traded in the marketplace and must assume the responsibility for policing the trading of their certificates. Companies may issue serialized ownership certificates in whatever denominations they choose. Once issued, however, companies must not allow the certificates to be divided so two certificates bear the same serial number, for to do so will soon make the tracing of ownership difficult and open the door to fraud and deceit. Nor should they allow phantom shares due to uncovered short-selling or other dubious machinations to find their way into the marketplace. It is best if companies manage the buying and selling of their own shares, so the identity of the owners, and the number of shares they own, is always available to company officials. Companies may, however, choose to assign this responsibility to a trusted and reputable outside institution.

As for charitable institutions, no one should expect to become wealthy working for them. Contributors have a right to expect that a large portion of the funds they contribute will go to the people the institutions were created to help, and not to the people who manage the institutions. The people at the top of charitable institutions should be satisfied with modest compensations. This office will have to decide how much of the total income, for each type of institution, can be used to cover administrative costs. It will have to decide how a charitable institution is to be defined. It will also have to ensure that annual audits reveal to contributors everything they want to know about the institution they are helping to support.

 

Section 11. The Office of Mass Media Regulation

This office will absorb the Federal Communications Commission.

In an effective democracy the future of the country is in the hands of the voting public. That is as it should be. But the voting public cannot do their due diligence when vital information is deliberately withheld from them. That is what is happening today here in the US. Our most important information outlets are owned and controlled by the wealthy and powerful. They dictate what we hear as news and how it is presented. Their purpose is to control the way most us think, and they have been distressingly successful.

Well-compensated and compliant newscasters issue fake news, outright lies, and lies of omission. They concentrate on the mundane, fail to tell complete stories, and sensationalize murder, mayhem, and fierce and destructive weather happenings throughout the nation and around the world, all in a pretentious show of diligent news reporting. To the well informed, however, the basic dishonesty of the US mass media is starkly evident.

Our nation is bankrupt and the market for US debt securities is in a state of collapse, but not a single popular television newscaster or newspaper editor in the nation will say so. The wisdom of our numerous wars, how they are impoverishing our nation, unhinging foreign nations and destroying their cities, and how the wars might end, is never discussed on the 5:30pm television news broadcasts or editorialized in the nation’s leading newspapers. Though the answers may be painful to contemplate, it’s still vital news that citizens deserve to hear.

Our mass media sensationalizes reports of Russian pilots buzzing our warships but they have nothing to say about where the ships are located. Why does the news media present only half of a story? If a Russian warship prowled close to the US shoreline wouldn’t the US military be quick to show its displeasure in a similar way.

Currently news reporters are making much ado about Russian technicians hacking into US computer systems in attempts to influence our national elections, while blissfully ignoring similar work against Russia by the National Security Agency, the Central Intelligence Agency, and the US Treasury’s Exchange Stabilization Fund. Again, citizens are presented with an incomplete story. The US mass media has been captured by the rich and powerful. They dream of controlling and owning the world. Their hold must be broken.

Above all other institutions, the mass media is obligated to tell the truth as much as the truth can be known and understood. It is their reason for being. The mass media is the great linchpin of social cohesion and prosperity, and the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth must be its highest calling. When the owners and directors of the mass media use the media to manipulate the way people think, and when news casters and writers lie to their listeners and readers and promote fake and diversionary news and lies of omission, they are committing moral crimes of the highest order. Wars and ruin can follow in their wake. Prosecutors should not seek fines. Their goal should be to put people behind bars.

This office will assume the duties of the Office of the Decriminalization of the US Mass Media as it is terminated by the end of the transition period.

See Part Three, Chapter Two, Section 12.

 

Section 12. The Office of Voting and Elections Regulation

This office will absorb the Federal Election Commission. It will ensure that all governmental voting and vote tallying within the nation’s borders is dependable, accurately counted, verifiable, unambiguous, free of skullduggeries of all sorts, and available to all qualified voters. It will ensure that all political parties and candidates vying for central government offices are in compliance with the requirements of the revised constitution.

The office is also charged with minimizing the influence of big money in the elective process, ensuring that the criminal histories of candidates are of a minor nature and understood by the public and, as much as anyone is able to judge, the candidates have a good understanding of the problems they will likely encounter should they win the office they are competing for.

Political parties are defined by their moral, economic, and political philosophies against the backdrop of the SEP Spectrum, the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth, the Universal and Unifying Morality, and the concept of government as a component of the division of labor. They are the focus of monetary donations and provide a framework for professional and volunteer enthusiasts. They provide the organizational skills and wherewithal candidates need to carry their message into every city and rural community. However, as political parties become more numerous, it is more likely some will represent special or radical interests. The electoral structure should, therefore, discourage the formation of excessive numbers of political parties.

The following party and candidate requirements will enhance the quality of the candidates and the stability of the political system at the national level, while minimizing the alienation of minority voters.

The political parties occupying the first two places, in terms of votes, in the previous national election will be designated most important parties by the Federal Office of Voting and Elections Integrity. Candidates endorsed by most important political parties will have their names and the name of their supporting party printed on the ballots of the next election. The names of other candidates must be written manually in provided spaces as voters fill out their ballots.

If it should happen that “write-in” candidates endorsed by a third political party garner more total votes than the candidates of one of the two most important parties, then that “write-in” party will take the place of the losing party on the most important list for the next election. Candidates who choose to run without endorsement by a political party will be “write-in” candidates only and will not upset the most important status of the two top parties.

Candidates for high central government elective offices who hope to be endorsed by a most important party shall be required by this office to personally write, without help, essays that document their views on all of the important current domestic and foreign issues of the day and make them available to news outlets. The essays should be a measure of the candidates’ own understanding of the issues and be free of input from friends, advisers, or experts. This requirement will increase mightily the intellectual level of political campaigning, and immediately reveal those weak in knowledge, thought, and expression. Newspaper editors and television news commentators can discuss the strengths and weaknesses of the essays and candidate appearances; and voters can render their decisions based on their reading of the essays, what they see of the candidates, and what they read in the newspapers and hear and see on radio or television.

Obviously, the essays must be available to party delegates for examination well before the delegates meet in convention to select their candidates. Candidates may make revisions and add addendums to their essays up to one month before the convention.

The parties designated as most important will meet in convention to endorse their candidates no later than six months previous to the election. The parties will pay all of the campaign expenses, including personal expenses, of their endorsed candidates between the time of endorsement and the election. Funds acquired through speeches or appearances of the endorsed candidates, or by other means, during the same time period will not flow into personal accounts of the candidates. Rather, the funds will flow directly into the coffers of the sponsoring party. Candidates may not accept gifts of any kind between the time of endorsement and the election. Spending by the party, between the time of endorsement and the election, must be fully documented and a matter of public record.

The Federal Office of Voting and Elections Integrity shall have the authority to place a limit on the amount of money any single entity may contribute, and each political party, most important or otherwise, will be allowed to spend during the campaign period. The campaign period will be defined as starting six months before the election and ending three days before the election. After the spending limit has been reached by individual parties and their candidates, their fund raising will close and an announcement made that no additional funds are needed. Contributions received after the campaign has ended will be returned to contributors. Contributions that cannot be returned may be retained by the party until the next election. After the third full month following the election, the political parties may start eliciting funds once again to rebuild coffers and infrastructures for the next election.

The purpose of the above is to temper the tendency, evident in many countries in the contemporary world, toward highly differentiated and viscous political systems where the numerous political parties are more interested in competing with each other for influence and power, than they are in serving the best interests of their nation. The restrictions also answer the public concern about the influence of big money in politics.

With the major candidates being treated in the same minimal way, and spending limits in place, it will be hard for big money to have its way. Most voters will vote for the candidates and parties printed on their ballots and will take comfort in knowing the major parties and their candidates are governed by common constraints. Most segments of society will find reasonable refuge within one of the two “most important” political parties. The candidates with the most votes will win the elections.

As a practical matter and in keeping with the principles of freedom, the amount of money individuals and institutions choose to spend outside of party organizations and influence, and on behalf of their favorite candidates, will have no limit. However, in all such spending activities, the sponsoring institutions or individuals must be named and traceable, and it must be made clear to all that the activity is being sponsored by individuals and institutions that are independent of the party and its candidate. If big money is at work trying to influence an election outcome, this is one way it will be evident. Viewers, listeners, and readers beware!

To further checkmate the corrupting influence of big money operating outside of party organizations and influence, the Office of Voting and Elections Integrity shall have the authority to prohibit any private or institutional spending on behalf of a candidate or cause, within a fifteen day period previous to the election.

Some people will complain bitterly about over-regulation of the elective process, but regulation is needed to counter the corruptive influence of wealthy patrons and institutions. It is better to have regulation than to permit big money to buy its way into the halls of government.

The following will also be enforced:

1. Each voting location shall have a trio of directors who, collectively, will ensure the following will be observed:

2. Several signs, using languages appropriate to the area, shall be posted at each voting location. They shall read as follows: “Voter fraud is against the law! Violators will be subject to prosecution.

3. All voters shall use paper ballots to record their choices. After counting, paper ballots together with all counting generated paperwork and their use locations, shall be preserved in an absolutely secure and fireproof state facility for at least five years.

4. Paper ballots may be machine counted but all write-in candidates must be manually recorded and counted.

5. Sufficient sample correlating between paper ballots and the machine counters will be accomplished and recorded at the end of the voting day to ensure the accuracy of the machine counts. Documented and notarized results will be preserved along with the paper ballots.

Each counting machine will be totally self-contained. They will have no means of communicating with each other or with any other entity.

6. At the end of the voting day, and after all of the counting is complete and properly recorded, the trio of directors will communicate the voting results, accompanied with a confidential eleven letter “signature” code previously supplied to the trio of directors, to the central counting facility.

After a brief period of time, the trio of directors will use the “signature” code to obtain, via an internet connected computer and printer, a feedback information sheet from the central counting facility that should match the information they sent in.

7. Each voter will be identified using a full name, signature, address, phone number, nation and city of birth, and right thumb print. Face profiling software is now coming of age. It may be that it will replace the aforementioned biologic imprints. All information will be sent to a central voting database center for future use. In the case of unexplained anomalies, the trio of directors may deny an applicant the right to vote in the future.

8. The legislature’s Department of Health and Human Services will send to each voting location a list of citizens assigned to said voting location who are also receiving government welfare payments. The trio of directors will ensure these names are removed from the list of authorized voters (as per Chapter Two, Section 17, below).

9. Between elections, law enforcement officers will visit homes of questionable voters to determine citizenship and resolve other issues such as ID theft or voting at multiple locations. Enforcement efforts should concentrate on preventing future abuse rather than punishing violators

 

Section 13. The Office of Military Equipment Exports Regulation

Most US citizens have grown up with the understanding that the US is the world’s leading showcase of freedom and democracy. It is much less understood that the US is also the world’s leading manufacturer and exporter of machines and hardware devoted to the killing of our fellow humans and the destruction of their cities. Sales have become so pervasive that US soldiers engaged in warfare, most notably in the so-called Middle East, are frequently engaging adversaries armed with US manufactured vehicles, weapons and ammunition. How many of our soldiers have been killed by bullets manufactured in the US? It is an interesting question for our president and members of congress.

Is not a grand contradiction at work? How can the US be the bastion of freedom and democracy while it is flooding the world with the machinery of death and devastation?

The motives of politics, profit, and jobs must be removed from the scene. No one should take any pride in the manufacturing of high quality killing machines except in the case of a defensive war. The sales and exportation of all types of military hardware is above all else a moral question. It is the duty of this office to provide that moral input.

This office will consult with the president and members of the Legislative Branch’s Foreign Relations and Military Strategies Committee, but the decision making will be its own. Military items of any and all types, from a single bullet to the largest of aircraft carriers, shall not be sold and/or manufactured for export without the express permission of this office. Any permission granted will be public information.

 

Section 14. The Office of Internet Security and Protection

In contemporary times and in terms of economics, politics, and happenings both domestic and foreign, the internet, or world-wide-web, is the most authoritative and honest source of information US citizens have. Of course it has its share of nonsense and ballyhoo, but over time astute listeners learn to separate the wheat from the chaff and are able to zero in on the most trustworthy and informative news sources.

Of course the moneyed and corporate oligarchy that currently manages the US from behind the scenes is anxious to achieve mastery of the internet. Already they are using it to propagate their own fake and confusing news designed to leave listeners disoriented and to cast discredit upon the worthy sources of information.

It is the duty of this office to fight any effort, no matter how small it may be, on the part of the Executive or Legislative Branches, any security agency, or any member or members of the moneyed and corporate oligarchy, or any proxy they might dream up, to achieve dominance over the internet.

If the internet goes, any semblance of freedom we still have in this nation will go with it.

 

Section 15. The Judicial Bureau of Litigation

The Supreme Court shall employ and maintain a legal bureau dedicated to the prosecution of the wealthy and powerful who would not otherwise be prosecuted for their crimes. It shall be called the Judicial Bureau of Litigation and shall be managed by the Moral Council.

The purpose will not be to win awards for litigants. That could destroy businesses and jobs. Rather the purpose will be to right wrongs and force the people at the top to pay for their criminal negligence or overt lawlessness through prison sentences. From this point forward, from presidents and congressmen, seated or retired, to the richest of bankers and industrialists, no one will be too big to jail.

The Judicial Bureau of Litigation will also engage in issues that are ambiguous or not mentioned in the revised constitution, where the central or lower legislative bodies, or lower courts, have failed to act or find it difficult or awkward to act, or have acted unwisely; or where citizens, in their quest for honest and moral behavior in government, business, the military, or other entities, are able to find no other recourse. The Supreme Court will ensure the right of access to evidence.

The Judicial Bureau of Litigation will organize prosecutions and carry them to civil or criminal courts for processing. It will also have the authority to carry or assign a prosecution to an international court, if the international court will accept it. Litigation may be based on the revised constitution, established law, or a general sense interpretation of the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth, the Universal and Unifying Morality, or the concept of government as a component of the division of labor.

Where a perceived wrongdoing is committed outside of the country, by any private or public institution, including the central government or any of its branches including the armed forces and intelligence agencies; then foreign citizens or their representatives, as well as representatives of foreign courts, shall have the same right of redress through The Supreme Court and The Moral Council, as do domestic citizens.

The compiled results of successful prosecutions will initially serve as guidelines for the future. Citizens may use the results in lower civil or criminal courts to seek redress against corrupt politicians, business and military leaders, and the purveyors of social decay. As the results are modified by time and experience, they will become a minimum behavior code for everyone working in the concerned entities. Over a period of time, as determined by the Supreme Court, the code will take on the force of law.

Generally, The Judicial Bureau of Litigation will focus on offending individuals first; such as presidents, members of congress, and chief executive officers, followed by offending groups, such as members of the board of directors; and then offending institutions. In the case of individuals, it will focus on those at the top first, and those lower down as necessary and appropriate.

The Judicial Bureau of Litigation shall have no authority to initiate action on its own. It shall be a reactive, not a proactive institution. Bureau action will be initiated only as a result of requests issued to it by the Supreme Court via the Moral Council, said requests having been successfully brought through lower courts to the attention of the Supreme Court.

In accord with their nature, petitions will be assigned to one of the following offices for processing. The Moral Council shall name directors to manage the following six offices and closely monitor their work. Directors shall have the authority to staff their respective offices as needed, and may on occasion engage private law firms to assist them in their work.

The following offices will be staffed according to workload. They are listed here mainly to indicate the range of possible litigious actions.

 

Section 16. The Office of Government, Intelligence, Military, and Federal Policing Integrity

This office shall be responsible for the investigation and prosecution of government, military, and federal policing officials, even of the highest order, who are suspected of woeful or disgraceful misconduct; allowing the use of unorthodox, wasteful, or fraudulent accounting practices; mistreatment of prisoners, soldiers, or citizens; or of otherwise directing their offices in a way that does violence to the revised constitution, the laws of the land, or the Universal and Unifying Morality.

The office shall have the authority to investigate, gather evidence, subpoena, obtain testimony, and to prosecute in civil or criminal courts. Juries shall be comprised of common citizens. Trial locations shall be uniformly distributed throughout the land so the responsibility for serving as a jurist can be similarly distributed. The Executive and Legislative Branches, the military and federal policing authorities, and those employed in intelligence work must never be trusted to keep themselves morally honest or faithful to the revised constitution.

The office will have no authority to issue edicts or pass laws. Rather, it will, as a result of successful prosecutions, compile a Code of Government, Military, Intelligence, and Federal Policing Ethics that will be used as a standard to judge future government, military, intelligence and policing practices as well as the behavior of individuals working in those institutions. As the resultant code of ethics is modified by time and experience, it will take on the force of law.

Hereafter, all persons employed in government, the military, intelligence, or federal policing, even at the highest levels, will have to weigh their actions against the requirements of the revised constitution, the laws of the land, the Universal and Unifying Morality, and the Code of Government, Military, Intelligence, and Federal Policing Ethics.

A primary goal of members of the Executive and Legislative Branches of government, and the military, intelligence, and federal policing authorities, should be to make sure the above office has nothing to do.

 

Section 17. The Office of Depository Institutions (Banks) Integrity

This office shall be responsible for the investigation and prosecution of depository institutions officials, even of the highest order, who are suspected of bringing malicious products into the marketplace, committing commercial theft or fraud, knowingly harming or cheating their depositors or customers, looting their companies, or otherwise directing their businesses in a way that does violence to the revised constitution, the laws of the land, or the Universal and Unifying Morality.

The office shall have the authority to investigate, gather evidence, subpoena, obtain testimony, and to prosecute in civil or criminal courts. Juries shall be comprised of common citizens. Trial locations shall be uniformly distributed throughout the nation so the responsibility for serving as a jurist may be similarly distributed.

This office will have no authority to issue edicts or pass laws. Rather it will, as a result of successful prosecutions, compile a Code of Depository Institutions Ethics that will be used as a standard to judge future depository institutions practices as well as the behavior of individuals working in said institutions. As the resultant code of ethics is modified by time and experience, it will take on the force of law.

The Code of Depository Institutions Ethics will complement or modify companion regulatory laws of the Judiciary’s Bureau of Regulation. Conflicts will be reconciled by conference committees or by the Supreme Court. Reconciled differences must be approved by the Supreme Court.

Hereafter, all persons employed in depository institutions, even at the highest levels, will have to weigh their actions against the requirements of the revised constitution, the laws of the land, the Universal and Unifying Morality, and the Code of Depository Institutions Ethics.

A primary goal of everyone employed in the depository institutions sector should be to make sure the above office has nothing to do.

 

Section 18. The Office of Brokerage Institutions Integrity

This office shall be responsible for the investigation and prosecution of brokerage institutions officials, even of the highest order, who are suspected of bringing malicious products into the marketplace, committing commercial theft or fraud, knowingly harming or cheating their depositors or customers, looting their companies, or otherwise directing their businesses in a way that does violence to the revised constitution, the laws of the land, or the Universal and Unifying Morality.

The office shall have the authority to investigate, gather evidence, subpoena, obtain testimony, and to prosecute in civil or criminal courts. Juries shall be comprised of common citizens. Trial locations shall be uniformly distributed throughout the nation so the responsibility for serving as a jurist may be similarly distributed.

This office will have no authority to issue edicts or pass laws. Rather it will, as a result of successful prosecutions, compile a Code of Brokerage Institutions Ethics that will be used as a standard to judge future brokerage institutions practices as well as the behavior of individuals working in said institutions. As the resultant code of ethics is modified by time and experience, it will take on the force of law.

The Code of Brokerage Institutions Ethics will complement or modify companion regulatory laws of the Judiciary’s Bureau of Regulation. Conflicts will be reconciled by conference committees or by the Supreme Court. Reconciled differences must be approved by the Supreme Court.

Hereafter, all persons employed in depository institutions, even at the highest levels, will have to weigh their actions against the requirements of the revised constitution, the laws of the land, the Universal and Unifying Morality, and the Code of Brokerage Institutions Ethics.

A primary goal of everyone employed in the brokerage sector should be to make sure the above office has nothing to do.

 

Section 19. The Office of Public, Private, Charitable and Not-for-Profit Institutions Integrity (other than Sections 17 and 18)

This office shall be responsible for the investigation and prosecution of public, private, charitable or not-for-profit business institutions officials, even of the highest order, who are suspected of bringing malicious products into the marketplace, committing commercial theft or fraud, knowingly harming or cheating their depositors or customers, looting their companies, or otherwise directing their businesses in a way that does violence to the revised constitution, the laws of the land, or the Universal and Unifying Morality.

The office shall have the authority to investigate, gather evidence, subpoena, obtain testimony, and to prosecute in civil or criminal courts. Juries shall be comprised of common citizens. Trial locations shall be uniformly distributed throughout the nation so the responsibility for serving as a jurist may be similarly distributed.

This office will have no authority to issue edicts or pass laws. Rather it will, as a result of successful prosecutions, compile a Code of Public, Private, Charitable or Not for-Profit Institutions Ethics that will be used as a standard to judge future public, private, charitable or not-for-profit institutions practices as well as the behavior of individuals working in said institutions. As the resultant code of ethics is modified by time and experience, it will take on the force of law.

The Code of Public, Private, Charitable or Not-for-Profit Institutions Ethics will complement or modify companion regulatory laws of the Judiciary’s Bureau of Regulation. Conflicts will be reconciled by conference committees or by the Supreme Court. Reconciled differences must be approved by the Supreme Court.

Hereafter, all persons employed in the above institutions, even at the highest levels, will have to weigh their actions against the requirements of the revised constitution, the laws of the land, the Universal and Unifying Morality, and the Code of Public, Private, Charitable or Not-for-Profit Institutions Ethics.

A primary goal of everyone employed in the public, private charitable or not-for-profit businesses sectors should be to make sure the above office has nothing to do.

 

Section 20. The Office of Mass Media Institutions Integrity

This office shall be responsible for the investigation and prosecution of mass media institutions officials, even of the highest order, who are suspected of promoting malicious products, committing commercial theft or fraud, knowingly harming or cheating listeners or readers in terms of consistently reporting false news, failing to report vital news, failing to investigate or confirm vital news stories, looting their companies, or otherwise directing their businesses in a way that does violence to the revised constitution, the laws of the land, or the Universal and Unifying Morality.

The office shall have the authority to investigate, gather evidence, subpoena, obtain testimony, and to prosecute in civil or criminal courts. Juries shall be comprised of common citizens. Trial locations shall be uniformly distributed throughout the nation so the responsibility for serving as a jurist may be similarly distributed.

This office will have no authority to issue edicts or pass laws. Rather it will, as a result of successful prosecutions, compile a Code of Mass Media Ethics that will be used as a standard to judge future mass media practices as well as the behavior of individuals working in said institutions. As the resultant code of ethics is modified by time and experience, it will take on the force of law.

The Code of Mass Media Ethics will complement or modify companion regulatory laws of the Judiciary’s Bureau of Regulation. Conflicts will be reconciled by conference committees or by the Supreme Court. Reconciled differences must be approved by the Supreme Court.

Hereafter, all persons employed in mass media institutions, even at the highest levels, will have to weigh their actions against the requirements of the revised constitution, the laws of the land, the Universal and Unifying Morality, and the Code of Mass Media Ethics.

A primary goal of everyone employed in the mass media sector should be to make sure the above office has nothing to do.

 

Section 21. The Office of Voting and Elections Integrity

This office shall be responsible for the investigation and prosecution of election officials, candidates, paper ballot handlers and counters, counting machine manufacturers, handlers and readers, and voters, even of the highest order, who are suspected of engaging in fraudulent or illegal election and voting activity, or of otherwise abusing the voting and elections process in a way that does violence to the revised constitution, the laws of the land, or the Universal and Unifying Morality.

The office shall have the authority to investigate, gather evidence, subpoena, obtain testimony, and to prosecute in civil or criminal courts. Juries shall be comprised of common citizens. Trial locations shall be uniformly distributed throughout the land so the responsibility for serving as a jurist may be similarly distributed.

This office will have no authority to issue edicts or pass laws. Rather it will, as a result of successful prosecutions, compile a Code of Voting and Elections Ethics that will be used as a standard to judge future candidates for office, voting and election practices, as well as the behavior of individuals who direct and organize election processes. As the resultant Code of Voting and Elections Ethics is modified by time and experience, it will take on the force of law.

As it takes on the force of law, this code will complement or modify companion regulatory laws of the Bureau of Regulation (see Section 7). Conflicts can be reconciled by conference committees or by the Supreme Court. Reconciled differences must be approved by the Supreme Court.

Hereafter, all candidates for office, and all persons employed in the business of voting and elections, even at the highest levels, will have to weigh their actions against the requirements of the revised constitution, the laws of the land, the Universal and Unifying Morality, and the Code of Voting and Elections Ethics.

A primary goal of candidates and everyone employed in the business of voting and elections should be to make sure the Moral Council’s Office of Voting and Elections Integrity has nothing to do.

 

Section 22. The Administrative Council

The Administrative Council will act as the administrative arm of the Supreme Court and will be subservient to it. The Administrative Council is charged with preserving the integrity of the nation’s debt, currency, and coinage, and will control key offices such that it will be impossible for the Executive and Legislative Branches of government to expand beyond their constitutionally and morally prescribed limits. The council shall answer only to the Supreme Court. The Supreme Court shall work closely with the Administrative Council and constantly monitor what it and its six offices are doing.

The Administrative Council shall consist of seven highly trained, respected, and experienced administrators, each of whom has been appointed to his or her position by the Supreme Court. The appointments shall be considered working lifetime assignments. However, in the interests of maintaining a vibrant Administrative Council, members should not serve beyond their seventy-fifth year. Members should have the good sense to leave the council if their reputation or ability to perform comes into question. The Supreme Court shall have the authority to remove from office, for just cause, one member of the Administrative Council in each calendar year. The Supreme Court shall also, on an annual basis, appoint a member of the Administrative Council to serve as the council chairperson. Appointments may be renewed at the Supreme Court’s discretion.

The Administrative Council will monitor and guide the following six offices and shall be responsible for appointing their respective directors. The directors shall have the authority to staff their respective offices as needed, but staff members must be approved by the Administrative Council.

During the Transition Period, the Revolution Congress’ Committee to Organize, Staff, and Oversee the Transformation and Operation of the Judiciary shall be responsible for the initial staffing of the Administrative Council and all of its subsidiary offices. As the work of the Revolution Congress winds down, the responsibility of staffing the Moral Council and its subsidiary offices will fall to the Supreme Court.

 

Section 23. The Office of the Comptroller of Paper and Metallic Money Standardization

This office will be a substantial organization with many branch offices located throughout the nation. Federal Reserve currency is now government currency. The care and control of the nation’s currency will be assigned to this office. Its mandate is the eventual establishment of a one hundred percent gold backed and fully redeemable proxy gold currency.

The first duty of this office will be to restore the cash accounts (not investments) of depositors of banking institutions closed as a consequence of the collapse of fractional reserve banking, and reopened as functional, depositor owned, not-for-profit institutions. Cash payouts will be drawn from the Captured Cash Account. If additional cash is need it will be provided by this office’s Bureau of Engraving and Printing. This should not be considered money printing in the pejorative sense; it is simply restoring cash that has been looted by the previous banking system.

The captured gold will be held in a permanent storage facility. When the OCPMMS is able to issue one-hundred percent gold proxy notes the captured gold equivalent in gold proxy notes will be available to help reconstitute cash accounts or fund government operations.

The newly organized OCPMMS will be responsible for servicing the old currency in terms of replacing worn bills and making adjustments to the most desired denominations, but it will not be allowed to add to the currency stock. Once it is understood there will be no more currency creation, it must be hoped that the fiat dollar will retain a usable amount of value.

With the ratification of Article XXVIII, it should be understood by holders of US currency abroad that the currency will eventually be retired in favor of an improved version to be used within US boarders only.

In terms of establishing a new gold-based money system, the question arises, what is the quickest and least disruptive method for a nation to convert from a fiat currency system to a one hundred percent gold-based money system? As an answer to that question, something like the following will have to be accomplished:

1. Gold must be set free of all controls so it may find its value in terms of the existing fiat national currency. It is essential that gold should circulate freely as money alongside of the fiat currency. Accredited and regulated gold stores should be encouraged to establish themselves in every city and town.

OCPMMS selected mints will be encouraged to mint bars and coins as needed by the marketplace. The selected mints will purchase their gold from US producers and the marketplace. The OCPMMS will monitor the quality of both mints and producers.

Gold is, however, weighty, inconvenient, and, in large volumes, difficult and costly to transport. People will tire quickly of carrying large numbers of heavy coins in their pockets and purses. The nation’s old fiat currency will become a de facto gold proxy currency and will provide people with the money convenience they desire. The free marketplace will determine its unit value in terms of gold.

2. After the market price of gold has been established in terms of the nation’s fiat currency, a possibly traumatic event, the government must declare that gold is the primary money of the land. The unfettered use of gold as money will impose a discipline on the managers of government and business that a soundly based and moral society cannot do without.

3. If it is judged that the useful value of the fiat currency with respect to gold is too low, the OCPMMS will announce a reverse currency unit split to a value that it will consider useful for everyday transactions. It will issue the new currency in exchange for the old to US businesses and citizens only. All dollar denominated assets will be subject to the same reverse unit split.

The new fiat currency, not denominated in terms of gold, will be given a new and attractive appearance and will use the most advanced and cost-effective anti-counterfeiting technologies. The OCPMMS will declare that, beyond a certain date, all old unconverted fiat currency notes will be considered valueless.

At the owner’s discretion, the new fiat currency notes will be deposited in a retail bank of the owner’s choice and in the name of the owner. The new currency will be used for domestic spending only. As before, the free marketplace will determine the relationship between the new currency and the price of gold.

4. As owners choose they may use the new currency to buy gold coins or bars at any gold shop and then use them to buy one hundred percent and fully convertible gold proxy bills from this office or any of its regional offices (see Part Two, Chapter Two, Section 4). The new gold proxy bills will state clearly they are for domestic use only and must stay within the national boundaries.

5. The OCPMMS will announce a date by which all US currency, not denominated in terms of gold, must be exchanged for one hundred percent, fully convertible gold proxy bills.

6. All gold mines located within the US territory will be required to sell their output, at market prices, either to selected mints as noted above or directly to the OCPMMS. In exchange for the gold this office will offer gold equivalent bills in whatever denominations the mining companies might chose. The gold equivalent bills will be fully redeemable in gold on demand, but only within US borders.

7. Exports and imports will be financed through the medium of physical gold only. Under gold, the so-called balance of payments problem will be self-correcting by a change in the price of gold within each trading nation. If a national currency is used, it will upset the standard with which gold is judged within the nation in question.

 

It must be left to the marketplace to iron out the details. After the transition is complete, most domestic transactions will be in terms of the one hundred percent gold proxy currency. A slightly higher price may be charged for those who choose to pay with physical gold.

In order that the quality and value of the national coinage and gold proxy currency may be maintained; and to keep government officials at all levels, as well as those engaged in all forms of business, on the straight and narrow path, the OCPMMS must be kept totally independent of the Executive and Legislative Branches of government. The Executive and Legislative Branches must never have any control over the national coinage, the gold proxy currency, or any of the precious metals. Nor will the government be allowed to own gold or silver mines or to mint coinage.

The OCPMMS will be charged with maintaining the integrity and value of the national gold coinage and gold proxy currency in a manner that is consistent with the revised constitution, will forever remain a standard against which all other things may be judged with confidence, and will forever garner and hold the respect of all people engaged in economic activity both within and outside of the nation. The OCPMMS will work with selected, accredited, and regulated private mints to standardize the gold content and appearance of various coin denominations proved desirous through usage in the marketplace. Mint marks must be clear and traceable, and the coinage produced must truly and honorably contain the measure of gold as stated on the coin. With the exception of the mint marks, the appearance of each denomination must be uniform so as to be immediately recognized by users.

Seriously damaged, clipped, or badly worn coins must be immediately rejected in the marketplace. The owners of such coins will be free to bring them to any regional OCPMMS to be exchanged for either newly minted coins of the scrape weight equivalent, the scrape weight equivalent in gold proxy currency, or any combination thereof. Each regional OCPMMS must maintain a store of newly minted coins for this purpose. The owner will be asked to sign an affidavit explaining how and when he came into possession of seriously damaged or clipped coins. Supreme Court police may be assigned to investigate the statements. Coins with moderate wear may be freely exchanged for new coins at any regional OCPMMS. The OCPMMS will sell the faulty coins to the closest authorized mint for their melt value.

The OCPMMS will exercise the same care in maintaining the gold proxy paper currency. Damaged or worn bills may be turned in to any regional OCPMMS for replacement. The parent OCPMMS will have the equipment and skilled personnel to produce the replacement bills. The office will have no authority to add to the money stock.

For purposes of stability, the gold proxy currency must stay within the confines of the nation’s borders so as not to upset the balance between it and the gold that offsets it. The proxy currency must have no recognized value outside of the nation’s borders, nor shall it be accepted as payment for exports. Only physical gold or gold proxy notes issued by international trade banks will be used for purposes of international trade, foreign travel, or investment, etc.

There is no doubt that unscrupulous people will engage in every form of skullduggery to frustrate the work of the OCPMMS. Time and experience will show how to deal with them in the best way.

The following are some tactics the OCPMMS might employ to protect the gold proxy currency.

Make the bills hard to counterfeit.

Serialize and encode all bills.

Use computerized inter-connected readers at central locations to discover miss-matches and duplications. Anomalous bills can be tagged for examination and possible criminal activity investigated.

Periodically call in all bills for reissuance. New bills should be obviously different from the old. People who bring in large numbers of old bills that have not been read for a long time should be required to sign affidavits explaining why. Suspicious circumstances should be investigated. Where criminal activity is discovered, the old bills should be confiscated and replacement bills distributed through government spending. Currency not turned in for replacement after a certain length of time should be rendered null and void and replacement bills distributed through government spending.

Large cash transactions should be conducted at locations where bills can be read and authenticated. The goal should be to keep the number and denominations of bills outstanding commensurate with recorded serial numbers and with the amount of gold held in deposit to back them up. Penalties for attacking the nation’s money structure should be severe. Hopefully, rich and nefarious banking families will be a thing of the past.

International trading banks or branches will be created to serve travelers and international businesses. Travelers and businesses will deposit physical gold into accounts against which they may write checks, use electronic debit cards, or exchange for an internationally recognized one hundred percent gold-backed proxy currency issued by the servicing bank. The number of international trading banks should be limited by international agreements so the quality and recognition of the various international bank proxy currencies can be maintained at a high level. Clearing operations must be rapid, open, and honest.

 

Section 24. The Office of the Comptroller of Central Government Debt

This office will be fully operational only on such rare occasions as when central government debt is allowed to exist. The Comptroller of the Central Government Debt will be answerable to the Administrative Council.

The decision to accumulate debt shall rest solely with the Supreme Court. To help it arrive at its decision, the Supreme Court may hold hearings with members of the Executive and Legislative Branches, as well as with high level members of the military.

Under only the most dire of circumstances, such as a defensive war, and only as the Supreme Court gives its permission, the office may issue a call for citizens to open OCCGD accounts, and deposit gold or gold proxy currency into them at time durations and interest rates offered by the OCCGD. The deposits will then be delivered to the national treasury for its use.

Should a war situation become extremely desperate, and with the permission of the Supreme Court, the OCCGD would have the authority to issue fiat paper notes that could be used in everyday transactions and would be redeemable in gold at a specified future date.

The Comptroller of the Central Government Debt shall also have the authority, under the guidance of the Supreme Court, to levy taxes and force repayment. It shall be a prime function of the Comptroller of the Central Government Debt to retire central government debt as soon as possible. The tax rate needed will simply be added to the tax rate imposed by the Office of Taxation (see below). Under all but the most unusual of circumstances, the central government debt must stand at zero. Central government debt is anathema to sound government, a sound economy, sound money, and the Universal and Unifying Morality.

 

Section 25. The Office of the Comptroller of Central Government Taxation

The Treasury Department’s Internal Revenue Service, the Alcohol and Tobacco Tax and Trade Bureau, and appropriate subordinate offices of the Bureau of Fiscal Service will be transferred to the OCCGT by the DRC. (see Part Three, Chapter Two, Section 4).

Revenue flowing into the OCCGT will be used to fund the Revolution Congress and all of its activities including the reformed Judiciary, and finally, all other aspects of the federal government.

The power to tax will be taken away from the Executive and Legislative Branches and assigned to this office. This office will convert the present tax structure to a uniform consumption tax at the final level that everyone will pay. It will also provide the Executive and Legislative Branches of the central government with all of the funds they need for their operations. It shall simply grant whatever requests it receives, without judgment or rationing.

This new policy will create a feedback loop that is wholly missing in today’s world. All citizens will understand the burden of government in the same way and to the same degree, and government spending will be limited by the taxpayer’s willingness to pay as indicated by their choices at the voting booth. The door to money printing and debt accumulation will be closed, and the budget will always be balanced.

This simple act will correct a host of corruptions. Our mindless wars and quest for world hegemony will no longer be affordable. Politicians will lose their status as wealth brokers and will have to concentrate on squeezing every last ounce of benefit from each tax dollar. The government as a system will become far more efficient. Citizens will learn to get along without government aid and will become more efficient and disciplined at providing for themselves and their loved ones. The tendency to over-populate will be self-correcting.

Assuming a national sales and service tax at the consumer level, this office will be responsible for collecting taxes from every business that is engaged in providing goods and/or services to the public, including goods and/or services sold in the export market. Exemptions should be minimal (see Part Two, Chapter Two, Section 5) and, post-revolution, will be the result of negotiations between the Supreme Court and representatives of the legislative branch, with final authority resting with the Supreme Court. To monitor compliance, this office shall have the authority to audit the ledgers of every business it utilizes in the tax collecting process.

In the case of noncompliance, the penalties imposed will be the result of negotiations between the director of this office and representatives of the legislative branch. The office will need a sizable enforcement organization comprised of auditors, police authorities, and prosecution lawyers. There should be no doubt in the minds of businesspeople of the need for compliance.

The two most important duties of the comptroller of this office will be to set the national tax rate and to make sure the Executive and Legislative Branches are always supplied with sufficient funds to cover their expenditures. The director will have the authority to make monthly changes and may find it advantageous to create a reserve fund to compensate for seasonal changes and other variations in tax receipts to stay ahead of the demands of policy makers.

The comptroller should try to keep the tax rate as constant as possible, while making sure that sufficient funding for the government is always available. Spending oversight shall be the responsibility of the Executive and Legislative Branches. This office shall never have the authority to go negative, which is to say, to accumulate debt. All central government debt will be the responsibility of the OCCGD.

Under this arrangement, citizens must understand a commensurate tax increase will immediately and automatically follow the passage of every new spending program adapted by the Executive and Legislative branches. If taxpayers are unhappy with the tax rate as set by the comptroller of this department, they have the privilege of voting their disapproval of executive and legislative actions at the next election. Their ire should be directed toward the legislators and the president, not the director of this office. It should be clear in the mind of every citizen that the tax rate is a direct and automatic function of government size and spending.

The previously existing tax structure may be used until the end of the current taxable year, at which time it must be dismantled, and a national consumption tax (as per Part Two, Chapter Two, Section 5) instituted to take its place.

 

Section 26. The Office of Appointments

The practice of allowing the President to select directors and commissioners etc., to head a host of government agencies and departments, including members of the Supreme Court will be discontinued. Cronyism, unqualified leadership or the heavy hand of political control, too often lead to criminality, underperformance, or outright paralysis of the institutions in question.

Henceforth the selection and vetting of all candidates, with the excepting of Supreme Court candidates (see Section 1. above) will be the responsibility of this new office of the expanded Judiciary. Members of the Administrative Council and this office, meeting jointly, will make the final selections.

Initially, the Revolution Congress’ Committee to Organize, Staff, and Oversee the Transformation and Operation of the Judiciary will select nine alternate members of the Revolution Congress to staff this office. As the transformation period winds down, departing members will be replaced by the Administrative Council.

The Office of Appointments will grow into a substantial office. Numerous committees will have to be staffed commensurate with the categories of appointments that must be named.

As part of the revolutionary process, this office, together with the two Judiciary councils, shall name a completely new slate of directors and commissioners, etc., to head the agencies and departments, etc., traditionally named by the president. The new directors and commissioners, etc., will be instructed to immediately terminate and root out all criminal, unethical, manipulative, or subversive activities within their respective institutions.

Under the new arrangements, directors and commissioners, etc., may remain at their posts over several election cycles. This is as it should be. Talents and understanding acquired over many years will be put to good use and to the benefit of citizens.

If members of the legislative branch are displeased with the work of certain directors or commissioners, etc., they may appoint panels to gather evidence and hold hearings at which said directors or commissioners, etc., will be required to testify if asked. Results of the inquiry, with possible replacement suggestions, will then be presented to this office for its consideration.

 

Section 27. The Office of Financial Records

The judicial branch will be supported by the fines it levies and, when needed, by a special tax. All fines levied will be sent to this office for recording and processing. In addition to the fines, this office shall have the authority to levy a flat tax in whatever amount is necessary to support the work of the judicial branch. The tax rate needed will simply be added to the tax rate imposed by the Office of Taxation.

Centralizing the funding needs of the judicial branch in this office will enable a more careful monitoring of the cost of the judicial branch. This office will be audited annually and the audit made available for public scrutiny.

 

Back to Top

 

 

****

 

 

Chapter Nine

The Restructured Legislative Branch

 

Section 1. Voting and Legislation Requirements

The revised constitution shall require a sixty-seven percent approval vote of the full membership of each house of the legislative branch for any legislation to be delivered to the president’s desk for her or his signature. Too much corrupt and unsustainable legislation is passed by a mere majority of votes. The legislation shall become a part of the law of the land only when the president has affixed his or her signature to it. The failure of the president to sign legislation within one calendar month after receiving it shall be regarded as a veto.

The president shall have the authority to veto any legislation, or part thereof, passed by a less than seventy-five percent vote of the full membership of each house. Any legislation passed by a seventy-five percent or greater vote of the full membership of each house will become the law of the land whether or not it is signed by the president.

Legislation prepared for voting must remain unchanged for twenty-eight consecutive days prior to the vote. This rule will allow the legislators adequate time for study, and will prevent surreptitious changes from being inserted at the last moment.

It shall be unlawful for legislators to insert or hide what are called riders, earmarks, or pork authorizations inside of other legislative documents. Rider, earmark, or pork authorizations, and the like, will be inserted into a once a year “omnibus” legislative document and will be open to public scrutiny. It too, shall remain unchanged for twenty-eight consecutive days prior to the vote.

With the exception of the councils, bureaus, and offices of the Judicial Branch, the budgets of all US Government agencies and departments, etc. shall be controlled by the US Congress and shall be a matter of public information, including agencies and departments, etc. devoted to military, security, and intelligence activities.

 

Section 2. Restrictions.

The legislative branch shall have no authority to create entities that shall, in turn, have the authority to tax, incur debt, create credit or paper currency, or be free of direct oversight by the legislative branch, nor shall the legislative branch have the authority to impose programs on lesser governments without providing them with the funds needed to initiate and sustain the programs. The legislative branch shall have no authority to overrule or nullify judgments of the Supreme Court or the outcome of litigation that results from activities of the Supreme Court or its subsidiary councils.

 

Section 3. The Foreign Relations and Military Strategies Committee.

The authority to negotiate commercial and/or military treaties or other agreements with foreign governments shall rest with this committee and the president. For the sake of world peace and friendly relationships among all nations, foreign relations and military strategies must follow a common path. It makes no sense, and is potentially dangerous, for diplomacy to move the country in one direction, while military strategists are moving it in another.

For negotiations which do not include military considerations, the committee shall consist of seven members, six of whom must be highly respected and retired members of the legislative branch. Three will be retired from the senate and three from the house. Reflecting the importance of this committee, the six members must be the best that the legislative branch has to offer and each must be elevated to their positions by a seventy-five percent approval (vote) of the full membership of their respective legislative body. After an initial adjustment, terms will be for three years with memberships staggered on an annual basis. If the legislative branch fails to fill the seats of this committee within a one month period, the task will fall to the Judiciary’s Office of Appointments.

The president shall be the seventh member and the chairperson, spokesperson, and chief negotiator for the committee. However, the full committee must be present and working with the president during all direct negotiations with foreign governments. Differences within the committee should be reconciled before-hand so the committee and the president can appear unified while negotiating with foreign governments.

Non-military treaties or other agreements entered into with foreign nations must have the approval of at least five members of the seven-member committee. Resultant treaties and agreements must be endorsed by the president, at least four other members of the strategy committee, and ratified by sixty-seven percent of the full membership of each legislative body before the agreements become the law of the land. This is not to say the full membership need be present at the time of the vote.

For negotiations which do include military considerations, the committee shall consist of two additional members drawn by a random method from the joint chiefs-of-staff. The military terms will also be for three years and will be staggered on an annual basis after an initial adjustment.

Treaties or other agreements containing military considerations must have the approval of at least seven members of the nine-member committee. Agreements must be endorsed by the President and at least six members of the strategies committee before being sent to the senate and house for their approval.

The authority to engage the nation in warfare of any nature shall require the approval of no less than eight members of the nine member committee as well as a seventy-five percent approval of the members of each house of the legislative branch.

Any attempt by the President to wage a secret war or secret interventions of any nature in the affairs of foreign countries shall be cause for impeachment.

 

Section 4. The Domestic Relations and Strategies Committee

As in the case of the Foreign Relations and Military Strategies Committee, this committee shall consist of seven members, six of whom must be highly respected and retired members of the legislative branch. Three will be retired from the senate and three from the house. Reflecting the importance of this committee, the six members must be the best that the legislative branch has to offer and each must be elevated to their positions by a seventy-five percent approval (vote) of the full membership of their respective legislative body. After an initial adjustment, terms will be for three years with memberships staggered on an annual basis. If the legislative branch fails to fill the seats of this committee within a one month period, the task will fall to the Judiciary’s Office of Appointments.

The president shall be the seventh member and the chairperson, spokesperson, and chief planner for the committee. However, the full committee must be present and working with the president while any domestic program is being put together. Differences within the committee should be reconciled before-hand so the committee can appear unified when the president presents its work to the legislative branch.

All potential domestic programs advocated by the President must have the approval of at least five members of the seven-member committee. Resultant programs must be endorsed by the president, at least four other members of the committee, and ratified by sixty-seven percent of the full membership of each legislative body before the programs become the law of the land. This is not to say the full membership need be present at the time of the vote.

 

Section 5. Directors.

The Judiciary’s Office of Appointments shall name directors to preside over the following departments, as well as other departments, etc., the Legislative Branch might choose to retain or create. In addition, the following will be continuously monitored and regulated by small committees staffed by legislative members. Monitoring and regulating committees shall be staffed such that both houses are equally represented. The committees will link the various departments, etc., directly to the legislative assemblies. The directors and committees will report to the legislative assembly or assemblies annually, or more often if requested.

If conflicts arise between the various departments, etc., or if there is a need for coordination, the effected monitoring committees will meet to resolve the issues. Problems they cannot resolve will be presented to the full legislature.

The monitoring committees will keep their departments, etc. manageable. If an entity becomes unmanageable, monitoring committee members must work with their legislative colleagues to reduce its size until it becomes manageable once again. Monitoring committee members must be as bold and intrusive as necessary to be sure they understand every aspect of the office they are monitoring. They must never allow anything to be hidden from their view.

Legislators must never relinquish their authority over any entity they create. When an entity starts to operate on its own, it is cutting its ties to the constitution, the Universal and Unifying Morality, and the concept of government as a component of the division of labor, not to mention the legislative branch that created it. Monitoring committee members must be particularly wary of military and intelligence agencies. They like to go their own way and be free of supervision.

With some minor and reasonable exceptions, all of the following departments, etc., shall obtain one hundred percent of their funding from the Department of Financial Records (see below). Upon approval by their respective monitoring committees, each will submit an annual budget and funding request to the congress. To win approval, the requests must be approved by the president and a sixty-seven percent vote of the full membership of each legislative house. Approved requests will be forwarded to the Department of Financial Records for processing. Through negotiations, disapproved requests must be revised to accommodate objections and then resubmitted.

Some governmental departments or agencies may charge user fees to help sustain their operational costs or for other purposes. Examples might include entrance fees to national parks, logging rights in national forests, mining rights on national lands, and fishing rights in territorial waters. Department or agency directors and their respective legislative monitoring committees shall be responsible for the proper handling and processing of these fees.

 

Section 6. The Department of Financial Records (The National Treasury)

The responsibilities of this Department will be simple and straight forward. The department will maintain the financial records of the legislative branch. It will record all incoming and outgoing funds and provide funding for central government branches, offices, committees, departments, agencies, and public programs, etc., as needed. The department will receive one hundred percent of its funding from the Judiciary’s OCCGT and can expect all of its funding requests to be satisfied.

The Department of Financial Records shall have no authority to tax or accumulate debt. That authority shall rest solely with the judicial branch. The work of this department will be subject to an annual audit by an independent and reputable public auditing firm. The department will have no authority to restrict the audit in any way. The results shall be made available to the public.

The legislative branch may choose to create a reserve fund to be used in the case of a national calamity such as an earthquake, flood, or hurricane, etc. The legislative assembly or assemblies shall determine the amount of the fund. If a calamity occurs and it appears to the director of this office that the fund will be insufficient to cover the costs of rescue effort, then the director must work with legislators to obtain authorization for increased funding.

If other large expenditures are anticipated, the department director should obtain authority to accumulate a fund for each purpose.

The department shall also fund its own needs. Like other departments, it must submit an annual budget and funding request to the president and to the legislative branch. Like other departments, it must operate within its stated budget.

In the case of the departments listed below, and previously existing departments, etc., that may have survived the work of the Decriminalization and Restructuring Commission, as well as others the legislature may choose to create, members of the House and Senate will work with the new director, chosen by the Judiciary’s Office of Appointments, and the previous director and staff to downsize each of the following and previously existing departments and agencies, etc., and prepare them for a much leaner future. They will also have the unhappy task of determining how much funding the legislature will be able to provide. It’s not that these departments are necessarily unworthy enterprises. Rather, the wealth needed to keep them operating at their previous intensity simply does not exist.

 

Section 7. The Department of Agriculture

Section 8. The Department of Air Quality Management

Section 9. The Department of Air Transportation

Section 10. The Department of the Armed Forces

Section 11. The Department of Commerce

Section 12. The Department of Critical Habitat and Wildlife Protection

Section 13. The Department of Energy

Section 14. The Department of the Federal Bureau of Investigation

Section 15. The Department of Federal Prisons

The Department of Federal Prisons shall manage the federal prison system. The department will ensure that all prisoners are treated humanely, not subjected to overcrowded conditions, and provided with training and learning opportunities that will help them lead successful lives when they have served their time.

 

Section 16. The Department of Ground Transportation

Section 17. The Department of Health and Human Services

This department shall manage all federal welfare programs and payments. It shall determine when recipients are truly in need, when the need disappears, and when to stop payments. It shall also be responsible for disenfranchising the recipients of government welfare payments. Citizens should not be free to vote themselves benefits someone else will be forced to pay for. That is the only way governments can remain financially stable.

 

Section 18. The Department of Homeland Security

Section 19. The Department of Housing and Urban Development

Section 20. The Department of Intelligence

No branch of government or the military shall have its own intelligence organization. All intelligence institutions shall be organized under the above single subtitle and shall be under the direct management and control of the legislative branch. This department shall never be assigned, claim, or engage in, any war-making activities, or any covert activities that foreign nations might be offended by would the activities be known to them. In peacetime, secret activities shall be absolutely minimized and under the direct scrutiny of directors and legislative monitors and regulators. Under conditions of peace, secrecy is anathema to a free society and a peaceful world.

 

Section 21. The Department of Public Land Management (Interior)

Section 22. The Department of Justice

Section 23. The Department of Labor

Section 24. The Department of State

Section 25. The Department of Veterans Affairs

Section 26. The Department of Water Management

 

Back to Top

 

 

****

 

 

Chapter Ten

The Restructured Executive Branch

 

Section 1. The Structure

The executive branch shall consist of the President, the Vice President, the Foreign Relations and Military Strategies Committee, the Domestic Relations and Strategies Committee, and the Minister of Military Services (chairperson of the Joint Chiefs of Staff).

The two strategy committees will share in presidential decisions and will have the power to veto those decisions. The role of the Minister of Military Services in the decision making process will be advisory only. The minister will carry out the orders issued by the president and the two strategy committees.

 

Section 2. The Commander-in-Chief

The president shall be the commander in chief of the armed forces, but the ultimate authority to declare war, or to engage the armed forces in battle, even small ones, shall rest solely and inextricably with the legislative branch. The legislative branch shall have no authority to assign the power to declare war, or to engage the nation’s armed forces in battle, even small ones, to the executive branch. Nor shall the president have any authority to finance or direct proxy or surreptitious wars, to interfere either overtly or covertly in the affairs of other nations, or to issue executive orders or decrees, except as they are meant to enforce laws already on the books. Any attempt by the president to circumvent the authority of either the legislative or judicial branch shall be cause for impeachment.

The president may establish his/her own staff of advisors and seek information or advice from any source he/she might choose. The president will not have the authority to create any office, department, or agency, etc., without working through the Foreign Relations and Military Strategies Committee or the Domestic Relations and Strategies Committee (whichever is most appropriate), and the US Congress.

 

Section 3. The Chain of Command

Subject to the previous section, the military chain of command will be the President, the Foreign Relations and Military Strategies Committee, the Minister of Military Services, the commanders of the effected services, and the combat commanders.

 

Section 4. Foreign Affairs

The president will be the leading figure in the conduct of foreign relations, but must share his or her negotiating authority with the Foreign Relations and Military Strategies Committee of the legislative branch. Treaties and other agreements must be approved by the committee and the legislative branch before the agreements become part of the law of the land. International agreements can profoundly affect the lives of hundreds of millions of citizens of participating nations. The authority to enter into agreements with other countries is too weighty a responsibility and fraught with too many dangers for it to reside in the hands of a single person.

 

Section 5. The Budget

The president shall offer an annual budget to the legislative branch, which shall include a complete cost summary of existing programs as well as cost summaries of proposed new programs or expenses she/he believes are important for the well-being of the nation.

If the spending level is higher than the previous budget, the President must include a demand that the Judiciary’s OCCGT raise the tax rate to a level that will fully and honestly fund the new proposal on a pay-as-you-go basis.

 

Section 6. Restrictions

The president shall have no authority to overrule or nullify judgments of the Supreme Court or the outcome of litigation that results from activities of the Supreme Court or its subsidiary councils, nor shall the president have the authority to issue decrees that infringe on the responsibilities that belong to the judicial branch.

 

Section 7. Funding

The executive branch shall obtain its funding from the legislative branch Department of Financial Records, to which it will submit an annual budget and funding request.

 

Conclusion

 

This revised constitution shall, from the date of acceptance of this amendment by the Revolution Congress, be an instrument of the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth, Moral Duty, the Universal and Unifying Morality, Earthly Guardianship, and of government as a component of the division of labor. It shall be supportive of private property and private ownership of the means of production. It shall be supportive of a free marketplace, a freely evolved price edifice, and meaningful, honest economic calculation. That means the constitution must be an instrument of sound money, which is to say, gold.

The use of honest money (gold), and the inability to borrow, will greatly limit the ability of the Executive and Legislative Branches to pander to the larcenous desires of voters or special interest groups in exchange for votes and money.

Without currency printing and the ability to accumulate debt, politicians will be relieved of most of the corruptive temptations that are otherwise a part of their high positions of authority, and will be able to devote their time to the honest work of good governance. Our excessive military and our self-centered and bellicose foreign policies will also have to be reined in. Currency printing and debt will no longer be available to pay for them. Voters and special interest groups bent on obtaining undue considerations will see a structure that is not amenable to their purposes and will hopefully turn aside to pursue their interests in more honest and honorable ways.

The new structure will bestow the benefits all citizens have a moral right to expect from government, while minimizing the possibility of future government corruption and tyranny, and protecting citizens from their own larcenous tendencies. Within the limitations of the Judiciary’s Bureau of Truth and Reconciliation, it will open the door to the prosecution of criminals of the highest order including, whether past or present US Presidents, members of congress, agency directors, department heads, military authorities, corporate CEO’s, CFO’s, board members, and the richest of bankers, industrialists, and investors. Under the new system, no one will be too big to jail.

The ramifications of the passage of this amendment will be enormous and many faceted. Inconsistencies with these reform measures will have to be addressed on a one by one basis as Article XXVIII becomes fully implemented.

The central government will now be forced to operate under the new paradigm. The Executive and Legislative Branches will no longer have the authority to print currency and accumulate debt. They will only be able to spend what has been previously taxed. Reality and morality will be the new guiding lights, and the strong tendency toward corruption will have been removed.

With the ratification of Article XXVIII, and in the face of a collapsing economy and social disorder, all presidents, legislators, department, office, or agency heads, business owners, top managers, etc., and all who are in positions of authority, should start implementing changes in their organizations to make them compliant with the new paradigm. Crime must be abandoned and honesty and integrity embraced. The sooner the restructuring takes place the sooner the economy will start to hum once again and lives will be made safe.

All laws contrary or disruptive to this amendment are rendered null and void.

 

Back to Top

 

End of Article XXVIII

 

 

****

 

 

Chapter Eleven

The Revolution Congress

 

Section 1. Introduction and Statement of Purpose

A Revolution Congress will be convened to ratify Article XXVIII and to lock the nation and its government in the top third of the SEP Spectrum, which is to say, on the path of reality, truth, and righteousness. Everything the Revolution Congress does will be consistent with the principles that government is a component of the division of labor, that it is constrained by the same moral system that guides the interactions of all citizens, and that its defining function is to serve the people, not to dominate, deceive, cheat, lie to them, or lead them into unnecessary and ruinous wars.

The Revolution Congress will transform the nation’s economy from one based on the inebriating effects of printing press currency and debt accumulation, to one based on reality and truth, economic sobriety, and honest money, which is gold. The authority to accumulate debt and to tax will be taken away from the Executive and Legislative Branches and given to an expanded Judiciary, with the result that taxation will always be commensurate with spending and the annual budget will always be balanced.

Taking their cue from citizen protests, state governments must enter into a state of peaceful revolt against the national government. They must gather in congress to revise the constitution and reorganize the financial and governing sectors. Government corruption and the scourges of mindless wars, currency printing, and endless debt accumulation did not happen overnight, nor is it hard to understand the eventual consequences of such practices. The ominous future, even to the unschooled, has been obvious for decades. State leaders must read the trend and be fully prepared for what they are about to do.

The rebellion will be forceful only in terms of the absolute authority of the revolt, as granted citizens by the Declaration of Independence and as represented by the Revolution Congress, the absolute authority of the revised constitution, and the non-violent, non-destructive, but energetic and massive demonstrations by citizens.

 

Section 2. The Call

A determined and dedicated state legislature and Governor must issue an open call for a Revolution Congress and agree to be the host state. The call shall be for this amendment only and none others. The call shall consist of a request that the various state legislatures and respective governors indicate their agreement that:

1. A revolt is necessary.

2. Their state will be bound by and will support the ratification of Article XXVIII as so stated and implied in these pages.

3. Participating state militias will be placed at the disposal of the Revolution Congress and will accept no orders from Washington D.C. for the duration of the transition period.

4. They will agree to send and support a highly respected state official, present or past, and three fully capable backup alternates to represent their state at the Revolution Congress. Most of the alternates will be used to help staff the various commissions, offices, and bureaus of the DRC, the expanded Judiciary, the Revolution Congress, and for troubleshooting purposes.

5. They will agree to send and support three experienced lawyers, and three experienced accountants, three experienced police patrolmen, three experienced police investigators, one experienced committee chairperson, and one experienced judge to help staff the various commissions, offices, and bureaus of the DRC, the expanded Judiciary, the Revolution Congress, and for troubleshooting purposes

6. The host governor will select six participating states at random and ask each of them to send and support one experienced Chief of Police. The six police chiefs will provide leadership for the Judiciary’s Bureau of Policing and Investigations and its branch offices at the DRC and the Revolution Congress.

7. Participating states will agree to support the congress in whatever additional ways are needed or helpful.

The above commitments will be for the duration of the transition period. All delegation members and support personnel must be enthusiastic supporters of the revolution and willing to recite the new Pledge of Allegiance when the Revolution Congress is convened.

State governors are not included in the above. They will be needed at home to keep the peace. Hopefully all states will be willing participants. If not, a ninety percent response (forty seven states) will be considered a quorum. A large response is necessary so the congress can reasonably declare it represents the entire nation. On-going efforts must be made to gain the support of reluctant states. The host state will declare a time limit within which the call must be answered.

The host state must assume responsibility for organizing and temporarily funding the congress. It must provide security, a temporary chairman, a parliamentarian, several recording secretaries, staff a credentials committee, and provide meeting facilities for the Revolution Congress, its eleven commissions, twelve offices of the DRC, and the twenty seven councils, bureaus, and offices of the reformed Judiciary. Housing will have to be found for six to seven hundred participants.

The purpose and limitations of this congress must be understood by the citizenry if their support is to be enjoyed. Consequently, the discretions of the delegates must be restricted and the amendment as proposed herein must be accepted without substantial changes. Other possible changes will have to wait until the reformed government becomes functional.

As this congress convenes, the country will probably be in a state of economic and social upheaval. It will be a time of great fear and desperation. Banks and investment houses will be confiscating depositor’s currency and investor’s certificates. The Revolution Congress must move quickly to prevent the nation from sliding into anarchy or civil war. It should ask for citizen support and encourage massive but peaceful and non-destructive demonstrations throughout the land, focusing especially on those in government who resist the authority of the Revolution Congress. Citizens will be encouraged as they can see a vastly improved government in their future.

As soon as it is apparent the call is successful, the host governor and his/her state will be responsible for immediately initiating and initially funding the following three items:

1. A new, fearless and unhampered investigation of the so-called Nine-Eleven Attacks of 2001. Citizens deserve to know what really happened and why.

2. A new, fearless and unhampered investigation of the killing of President John F. Kennedy on 11/22/1963.

Extensive use should be made of the massive amount of work that has already been done by individuals and institutions dedicated to telling the true stories of what happened on those two fateful days.

The governor should call on every high school principal and college president in the nation to encourage their students to monitor the proceedings of these investigations via TV or the internet, and also do their own investigating. Technicians should make the video streams easily downloadable for later or repeat viewing. Upon completion of the hearings, presentation recordings, minutes, depositions, and other evidence should be made available to the public and also surrendered to the Judicial Bureau of Truth and Reconciliation for processing.

When the public, including members of the armed forces, become aware of the truth of these two events, they’re going to be very angry and will more readily join in the call for revolt.

3. Assemble a Nominations Committee of nine consisting of one alternate delegate from each of the first nine states joining in the revolt. The committee’s assignment will be to find five candidates from the early states that have joined in the revolt, willing to serve as president or vice-president of the Revolution Congress. Candidates must be well versed in Austrian economics, devoted to the passage of Article XXVIII as stated herein, and to the new Pledge of Allegiance.

The committee will also find candidates, perhaps hired from the local market, capable of serving as Secretary, Recording Secretaries, Parliamentarians, and Treasurers.

In keeping with the heavy importance of this revolt in the nation’s history, voting requirements will be equally weighty. A sixty seven percent affirmative vote of the full membership of the Revolution Congress will be required to pass each item on the agenda. Upon completion of their work, and following the lead of the Second Continental Congress in 1776, delegates will be asked to approve the final results unanimously.

Voting will be accomplished by electronic means whereupon individual delegates can cast their ballots by means of a numbered switch mounted on their desk. One or more computerized screens will display each vote, the vote tally, and the percentage of yes to no votes.

Within the context of these pages, all who are employed by the revolution, or who volunteer their services to the revolution, in any capacity whatever, will be required to recite the new Pledge of Allegiance in a formal setting (see Part Three, Chapter One, Section 4).

The Following should be broadcast live, both on the internet and on every news network willing to carry the event.

 

Section 3. The Agenda

Item 1. The Temporary Chairperson will call the meeting to order.

Item 2. All will recite the new Pledge of Allegiance

Item 3. Report of the Nominations Committee

Item 4. Discuss and vote to accept the report of the Nominations Committee

Item 5. Discuss and vote to accept the suggested organizational requirements (President, Vice-President, Secretary, Recording Secretaries, Parliamentarians, and Treasurers, etc.).

Item 6. Installation of new officers.

Item 7. Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “Starting with the passage of this item, participating states shall bear equal responsibility in funding this congress and its activities until such time as the Comptroller of Central Government Taxation will be able to fund it (see Part Four, Chapter One, Section 25).”

Item 8. Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “This congress accepts the second paragraph of the Declaration of Independence as the basis for revolt (see Part One of Article XXVIII).”

Item 9. Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “We, the delegates to this Revolution Congress are gathered together to ratify the 28th amendment to the US Constitution as it is described in these pages, and to lend such aid as is needed to implement said amendment, and for no other purpose.”

Item 10. Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “The states represented at this congress hereby declare they are in a state of peaceful rebellion against the established government of the United States, and since the delegates of this Revolution Congress are following the same process deemed lawful in the year 1776 by members of the Second Continental Congress, the members of this Revolution Congress hereby declare they are operating within the law and demand the established government of the United States, including members of the Supreme Court, the President, members of congress, and all of its departments, bureaus, and agencies, etc. including the Military, yield to this Revolution Congress in all matters, direct or inferred, that it shall herein, accept and ratify.”

Item 11. Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “We, the delegates to this Revolution Congress hereby ratify Article XXVIII to the US Constitution as so stated and implied in these pages from the beginning of Part One through Chapter Three of Part Four.”

With the passage of this item, it shall be unlawful for anyone to hamper the work of those engaged in implementing Article XXVIII and bringing it into fruition. This will include the destruction or hiding of evidence of criminal or unethical conduct on the part of individuals or institutions associated, either directly or indirectly, with the US government.

Item 12. Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “We, the members of this congress, ask the chairperson to appoint a commission of nine members to establish and oversee a Revolution Congress Branch Office of the Judiciary’s Bureau of Policing and Investigations”. The commission shall consist of one experienced committee chairperson who will chair the commission, two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress, two police chiefs, two lawyers, and two accountants, each drawn from the personnel provided by participating states. The commission and its branch office will be responsible for enforcing orders issued by the Revolution Congress or any of its various commissions. In keeping with the peaceful intent of the revolution, members of this division will not carry arms.

Item 13 Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “We, the members of this congress, ask the chairperson to appoint a commission of seven members to provide legal support for the Revolution Congress and its commissions, and for other miscellaneous duties.” It shall be called the Commission for Legal Support. The commission shall consist of one experienced committee chairperson who will chair the commission, two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress, and four lawyers, each drawn from the personnel provided by participating states.

In the case of the Revolution Congress, this commission will provide Letters of Consent and Compliance and Letters of Eviction for use against those who refuse to sign a Letter of Consent and Compliance. When signed by the President of the Revolution Congress, these letters will take on the full force of revolutionary law. They will be presented to the President and Vice-President, members of the Supreme Court, members of the House and Senate, the Secretary of Defense and members of the US Joint Chiefs of Staff. A third form, entitled Pledge of Non-Interference with the Revolution, will be provided by this committee for use in special situations.

In the case of failed and/or closed banks, (see Part Three, Chapter Two, Section 8) the Commission for Legal Support will compose and offer an application form entitled Deed for New Ownership of Failed and/or Closed Depository Institution which, when properly filled out and signed by the Association of Depositors of each failed and/or closed depository institution, and also signed by the President of the Revolution Congress or his/her representative, will validate the bank’s new name and new ownership.

In the case of the twelve regional clearing and assistance banks (see Part Three, Chapter Two, Section 5), the Commission for Legal Support will compose and offer an application form entitled Deed for New Ownership of Regional Clearing and Assistance Bank which, when properly filled out and signed by the Association of User Banks, and also signed by the President of the Revolution Congress or his/her representative, will validate the bank’s new name and new ownership. Content of the deed will be similar to the deed in the previous paragraph adjusted to reflect that the new owners are the depositors of the retail banks using the services of each clearing and assistance bank.

Item 14 Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “We, the members of this congress, ask the chairperson to create a seven member Commission for Temporary Appointments, composed of one experienced committee chairperson who will chair the commission, two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress, two lawyers, and two accountants, each drawn from the personnel provided by participating states.”

The commission will be responsible for naming qualified replacements for any important luminary, from the president on down, who refuses to sign a Letter of Consent and Compliance. Candidates for replacement duty will be drawn from the most gifted and consenting members of participating state governments. In the case of a military replacement, candidates will be drawn from the Joint Chiefs of Staff of Participating States. Appointments will be for the duration of the transition period.

Item 15. Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “We, the members of this congress, ask the chairperson to appoint a commission of seven members to compose a Letter of Apology and Deepest Regrets to foreign nations holding significant sums of US debt— the letters to be delivered to the ambassadors of said nations.” The commission shall consist of one experienced committee chairperson who will chair the commission, two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress, and four lawyers, each drawn from the personnel provided by participating states.

The message should remind the foreign governments that the Decriminalization and Restructuring Commission is simply expressing a reality that should have been evident to all foreign governments, thoughtful diplomats, trade experts, as well as common citizens, for decades. The US government’s debt has long been too extensive to be repaid in honest terms, and its constant growth and rolling over, together with un-controlled currency printing, has long demonstrated insolvency.

All foreign governments should be encouraged to join in the conversion to a one-hundred percent gold-standard system. Leaders may resist, but citizens will be encouraged. Citizens all over the world are well aware of the destructive effects currency printing can have on the value of their savings. Hopefully, they will make their views known in no uncertain terms. It would certainly be better if a group of important nations could agree to make the conversion simultaneously. That would make it more difficult for rogue nations to frustrate the movement toward gold.

Item 16. Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “We, the members of this congress, ask the chairperson to appoint a nine member commission composed of one experienced committee chairperson who will chair the commission, two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress, two layers, two accountants, and two judges, provided by participating states.” The commission will be responsible for the decriminalization and restructuring of linchpin US financial institutions and government structures. The commission shall bear the title, The Decriminalization and Restructuring Commission, or DRC. It will be assisted in its task by twelve subordinate offices.

This commission and the Commission to Organize, Staff, and Oversee the Transformation and Operation of the Judicial Branch during the Transition Period (Item 18) should proceed with their initializing work as quickly as possible. The DRC with its various offices, and the councils, bureaus and offices of the expanded Judiciary, should be up and running within a week or two.

This commission will also be responsible for staffing the twelve subordinate offices of the DRC (repeated here from the index). Each will be staffed with nine members drawn from the personnel provided by participating states.

Suggestions are as follows:

Section 2. The Office of Policing and Investigations

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two judges

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Section 3. The Office of Federal Debt Repudiation and the Declaration of Bankruptcy of all Social Benefit Programs that have their Reserve Accounts Denominated in now Worthless U.S. Government Instruments of Debt

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Six accountants

Section 4. The Office of Receivership of the US Department of the Treasury

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Four accountants

Section 5. The Office of the Decommissioning and Dismantling of the Federal Reserve System

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Four accountants

Section 6. The Office of the Decommissioning and Dismantling of the Central Intelligence Agency

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Eight alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress Accountants

Section 7. The Office of the Decommissioning and Dismantling of the National Security Agency

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Eight alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress Accountants

Section 8. The Office of the Transformation of all Depository Institutions

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Four accountants

Section 9. The Office of the Decommissioning and Dismantling of the Credit Card Industry (To Be Replaced by Debit Cards)

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Four accountants

Section 10. The Office of the Decommissioning and Dismantling of the Student Loan Program

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Four accountants

Section 11. The Office of the Restructuring of the Health Care Insurance Industry

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Four accountants

Section 12. The Office of the Decriminalization of the U.S. Mass Media (Rescue from a Nefarious and Control Seeking Elite)

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Four alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Four lawyers

Section 13. The Office of Receivership of the Department of Defense

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Three alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Three accountants

 

Item 17. Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “We, the members of this congress, ask the chairperson to appoint a commission of seven to organize, staff, and oversee the Office of the Joint Chiefs of Staff of Participating State Militias during the Transition Period.” The commission shall consist of one experienced committee chairperson who will chair the commission and six alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress, each drawn from the personnel provided by participating states. Employment will be for the duration of the transition period.

The Office of the Joint Chiefs of Staff of Participating State Militias will be staffed by a single high ranking officer chosen from the militias of each participating state by the respective governor. The chairman of the Joint Chiefs will be the ranking officer of the host state. The purpose of this office is to provide a command focal point to coordinate any possible mobilization, in part or in whole, of any participating state militia should it become necessary, and to oppose any effort on the part of the federal government, to do the same.

The joint chiefs shall be under the command of the President of the Revolution Congress. However, the president must have the approval of seventy-five percent of the delegates of the Revolution and a majority of the Joint Chiefs for any mobilization or assignment.

In keeping with the peaceful intent of the revolution, military service personnel mobilized or assigned to any duty, will not bear arms.

Item 18. Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “We, the members of this congress, ask the chairman to appoint a commission of seven to restructure and ensure compliance of the judicial branch during the transition period.” It shall be called The Commission to Organize, Staff, and Oversee the Transformation and Operation of the Judicial Branch during the Transition Period. The commission shall consist of one experienced committee chairperson who will chair the commission, two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress, two lawyers, and two accountants, each drawn from the personnel provided by participating states. In addition, when visiting with members of the Supreme Court, the commission will be bolstered by one patrolman and one investigator from the Office of Policing and Investigations.

The commission will visit the members of the Supreme Court with the purpose of obtaining signed Letters of Consent and Compliance (provided by the Commission for Legal Support and signed by the President of the Revolution Congress) from each of them, stating they recognize the supreme authority of the Revolution Congress, will support its work, and will agree to abide by its directives so long as said directives do not stray outside the purpose of the congress, as so stated or implied in Item 9. Though the issuance of these letters may seem redundant in view of the second paragraph of Item 8 (above), they will force key people to make their views of the revolution known. The commission will carry several Letters of Eviction with them in case they are needed.

The Revolution Congress should demand a speedy response from each of the judges. Every day of delay will multiply the nation’s fear and suffering. Judges who refuse to sign a Letter of Consent and Compliance will be issued a Letter of Eviction and ordered to vacate the premises. If need be, the order will be enforced by the two members of the Bureau of Policing and Investigations. If resistance is offered, the offender will be arrested and detained for the duration of the transition period and in a prison of a participating state. The vacancy will be filled by a person selected by the Commission for Temporary Appointments. Prisoners may opt out of prison after three days by signing a Pledge of Non-Interference with the Revolution. However, they will not be allowed to return to their jobs until the transition period is concluded.

As soon as the Revolution Congress is in possession of signed Letters of Consent and Compliance from each of the Supreme Court judges, including the replacement judges if any, similar letters must be dispatched to the President and Vice-President of the United States, Speaker of the House, President pro tempore of the Senate, members of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, the Secretary of Defense, members of the senate and house, and to all other luminaries the Revolution Congress deems appropriate. They will have the same choice as the judges—sign or be replaced.

If the members of the US Joint Chiefs of Staff and especially the President, Vice-President, and the Secretary of Defense can be persuaded to sign Letters of Consent and Compliance it would almost guarantee the peaceful implementation of Article XXVIII.

The goal is not outlandish. With the collapse of our money printing, fractional reserve banking, and debt oriented economy, funding for the military will be sharply and unavoidably reduced, thereby greatly eroding the power base of all military leaders including the president and Secretary of Defense. The best thing they can do for their nation is to cooperate with the Revolution Congress, help bring our overseas military forces and their military hardware home, with priority given to nuclear warheads, and help prepare the US military for a much leaner future. Members of the senate and house will see the writing on the wall, and will be in no position to object.

This commission will also be responsible for staffing the twenty seven new councils, bureaus, and offices of the Judicial Branch (repeated here from the index). Each will be staffed with nine members drawn from the personnel provided by participating states.

Suggestions are as follows:

Section 2. The Moral Council

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two judges

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Section 3. The Judicial Bureau of Policing and Investigations

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two judges

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Section 4. The Judicial Bureau of Truth and Reconciliation

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Four judges

Section 5. The Judicial Bureau of Sentencing Standards

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two lawyers

Six judges

Section 6. The Judicial Bureau of US Sovereignty

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Four alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

One lawyer

Two accountants

One judge

Section 7. The Judicial Bureau of Regulation

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two judges

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Section 8. The Office of Depository Institutions Regulation

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Four alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Section 9. The Office of, Brokerage Institutions Regulation

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Four alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Section 10. The Office of Public, Private, Charitable and Non-profit Institutions Regulation

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Four alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Section 11. The Office of Mass Media Regulation

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Two judges

Section 12. The Office of Voting and Elections Regulation

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Two judges

Section 13. The Office of Military Equipment Exports Regulation

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Four alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Section 14. The Office of Internet Security and Protection

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Two judges

Section 15. The Judicial Bureau of Litigation

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Two judges

Section 16. The Office of Government, Intelligence, Military, and Federal Policing Integrity

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Two judges

Section 17. The Office of Depository Institutions (Banks) Integrity

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Two judges

Section 18. The Office of, Brokerage Institutions Integrity

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Two judges

Section 19. The Office of Public, Private, Charitable and Not-for-Profit Institutions Integrity (other than Sections 17 and 18)

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Two judges

Section 20. The Office of Mass Media Institutions Integrity

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Two judges

Section 21. The Office of Voting and Elections Integrity

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Two judges

Section 22. The Administrative Council

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Four alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Section 23. The Office of the Comptroller of Paper and Metallic Money Standardization

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Six accountants

Section 24. The Office of the Comptroller of Central Government Debt

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Six accountants

Section 25. The Office of the Comptroller of Central Government Taxation

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Six accountants

Section 26. The Office of Appointments

One experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee

Two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress

Two lawyers

Two accountants

Two judges

Section 27. The Office of Financial Records

One experienced legislative who will chair the committee

Eight accountants

 

Item 19. Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “We, the members of this congress, ask the chairman to appoint a commission of seven entitled the Commission to Organize, Oversee, and Ensure the Compliance of the Executive Branch during the Transition Period.” The commission shall consist of one experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee, four alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress, and two lawyers, each drawn from the personnel provided by participating states. In addition, while visiting with the President and Vice-President, the commission will be bolstered by one patrolman and one investigator from the Office of Policing and Investigations.

The commission will visit the President and Vice-President with the purpose of obtaining signed Letters of Consent and Compliance from each of them, stating they recognize the supreme authority of the Revolution Congress, will support its work, and will agree to abide by its directives so long as said directives do not stray outside of the purpose of the congress, as so stated or implied in Item 5. The commission will carry two Letters of Eviction with them in case they are needed.

If either or both refuse to sign a Letter of Consent and Compliance, they will be issued a Letter of Eviction and ordered to vacate the premises. If need be, the order will be enforced by the members of the Bureau of Policing and Investigations. If resistance is offered, the offender or offenders will be arrested and detained for the duration of the transition period and in a prison of a participating state. The vacancy or vacancies will be filled by a person or persons selected by the Commission of Appointments. Prisoners may opt out of prison after three days by signing a Pledge of Non-Interference with the Revolution. However, they may not return to their jobs until the transition period is concluded.

Item 20. Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “We, the members of this congress, ask the chairman to appoint a commission of nine to ensure the compliance of the US Senate during the transition period.” It shall be called The Commission to Organize, Oversee, and Ensure the Compliance of the US Senate during the Transition Period. The commission shall consist of one experienced committee chairperson who will chair the commission, two alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress, two lawyers, two accountants, and two judges, each drawn from the personnel provided by participating states. In addition, while visiting the US Senate, the commission will be bolstered by fifteen patrolmen and fifteen investigators from the Office of Policing and Investigations.

The commission will visit the US Senate with the purpose of obtaining signed Letters of Consent and Compliance from each member, stating they recognize the supreme authority of the Revolution Congress, will support its work, and will agree to abide by its directives so long as said directives do not stray outside of the purpose of the Revolution Congress, as so stated or implied in Item 6. It must be hoped that most will acquiesce since their respective states will already be deeply involved with the revolution. The commission will carry a sufficient number of Letters of Eviction with them to use as needed.

Senators who refuse to sign a Letter of Consent and Compliance will be issued a Letter of Eviction and ordered to vacate the premises. If need be, the order will be enforced by members of the Bureau of Policing and Investigations. If resistance is offered, the offender or offenders will be arrested and detained for the duration of the transition period and in a prison of a participating state. Vacancies will be filled by a person or persons selected by the Commission for Temporary Appointments. Prisoners may opt out of prison after three days by signing a Pledge of Non-Interference with the Revolution. However, they will not be allowed to return to their jobs until the transition period is concluded.

Item 21. Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “We, the members of this congress, ask the chairman to appoint a commission of nine to ensure the compliance of the US House of Representatives during the transition period.” It shall be called the Commission to Organize, Oversee, and Ensure the Compliance of the US House of Representatives during the Transition Period. The commission will be staffed by one experienced committee chairperson who will chair the committee, two alternate members of the Revolution Congress, two lawyers, two accountants, and two judges, each drawn from the personnel provided by participating states. In addition, while visiting the US Senate, the commission will be bolstered by twenty-five patrolmen and twenty-five investigators from the Office of Policing and Investigations.

The commission will visit the US House with the purpose of obtaining signed Letters of Consent and Compliance from each member, stating they recognize the supreme authority of the Revolution Congress, will support its work, and will agree to abide by its directives so long as said directives do not stray outside of the purpose of the Revolution Congress, as so stated or implied in Item 6. Again, it must be hoped that most will acquiesce since their respective states will already be deeply involved with the revolution. The commission will carry a sufficient number of Letters of Eviction with them to use as needed.

House members who refuse to sign a Letter of Consent and Compliance will be issued a Letter of Eviction and ordered to vacate the premises. If need be, the order will be enforced by members of the Bureau of Policing and Investigations. If resistance is offered, the offender or offenders will be arrested and detained for the duration of the transition period in a prison of a participating state. Vacancies will be filled by a person or persons selected by the Commission for Temporary Appointments. Prisoners may opt out of prison after three days by signing a Pledge of Non-Interference with the Revolution. However, they will not be allowed to return to their jobs until the transition period is concluded.

Item 22. Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “We, the members of this congress, ask the chairman to appoint a commission of seven to ensure compliance of the Secretary of Defense and the members of the Joint Chiefs of Staff during the transition period.” It shall be called The Commission to Oversee the Compliance of the Secretary of Defense and the Joint Chiefs of Staff during the Transition Period. The commission shall consist of one experienced committee chairperson who will chair the commission, four alternate delegates to the Revolution Congress, and two lawyers, each drawn from the personnel provided by participating states. In addition, while visiting with the Secretary and the Joint Chiefs, the commission will be bolstered by two patrolmen and two investigators from the Office of Policing and Investigations.

The commission will visit the Secretary of Defense and the Joint Chiefs of Staff with the purpose of obtaining signed Letters of Consent and Compliance from each of them stating they recognize the supreme authority of the Revolution Congress, will support its work, and will agree to abide by its directives so long as said directives do not stray outside of the purpose of the congress, as so stated or implied in Item 6. The commission will carry a sufficient number of Letters of Eviction with them to use as needed.

Individuals who refuse to sign a Letter of Consent and Compliance will be issued a Letter of Eviction and ordered to vacate the premises. If need be, the order will be enforced by members of the Bureau of Policing and Investigations. If resistance is offered, the offender or offenders will be arrested and detained for the duration of the transition period and in a prison of a participating state. Vacancies will be filled by a person or persons selected by the Commission for Temporary Appointments. Prisoners may opt out of prison after three days by signing a Pledge of Non-Interference with the Revolution. However, they will not be allowed to return to their jobs until the transition period is concluded.

Item 23. Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “We, the members of this congress, declare that the transition period for this revolution shall be six months.” At the conclusion of the period, this congress, including all of its commissions and the DRC, shall declare itself dissolved.

Item 24. Hear closing reports from each of the above commissions. After each report, vote to accept closing report and dismiss reporting commission.

Item 25. Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “We, the members of this Revolution Congress, do hereby unanimously endorse this Twenty-eighth Amendment to the US Constitution.”

Item 26. Discuss and vote to accept the following motion: “We, the members of this Revolution Congress do hereby terminate the revolution and dissolve the Revolution Congress and all of its activities.” People detained for the duration are released. The judicial, executive, and legislative branches are released from supervision. They must now live within the new paradigm.

 

Back to Top

 

 

###

 

 

References

 

List One: Free Downloads

 

1. Carl Menger

a. The Origins of Money

2. Frederic Bastiat

a. The Law

3. Friedrich Hayek

a. Individualism and Economic Order

b. The Road to Serfdom

4. Henry Hazlitt

a. Man vs the Welfare State

5. Ludwig von Mises

a. Human Action

b. Socialism

6. Zbigniew Brzezinski

a. The Grand Chessboard

7. Paul Wolfowitz and Scooter Libby

a. Defense Planning Guidance for year 1994 – 1999

8. Thomas Donnelly (Principal Author)

a. Rebuilding America’s Defenses, A Report of The Project for the New American Century, September 2000

 

List Two: Must be Purchased

 

1. Pamela J. Ray

a. Interview with History – The JFK Assassination

 

List Three: Internet Viewing

 

1. Interview with Madeline D. Brown, Lyndon Johnson’s Mistress – YouTube

2. Eric de Carbonnel, The Exchange Stabilization Fund in Five Parts – YouTube

3. What really happened on 9/11/2001? Start with WTC Building 7.

 

 

****

 

 

About the Author

As of the publishing year of this book, (2017), I am an eighty seven year old man of no particular importance. I am not a trained writer. I do not consider myself an intellectual, and I do not consider my book a scholarly work. I have no formal training to speak of in any of the disciplines I write about, though for seventy years or more, I was an avid student regarding them. As a consequence, Revolt has evolved, over the past year or two, at the interest and understanding level of the common person.

I have worked most of my adult life as an avionics technician. Problem isolation and repairing were my specialties and things had to work when I signed off on them. That has been my approach to the moral, economic, political, and governmental problems I have discussed in the previous pages. Since my adolescent years, I have observed our democracy and its propensity, clearly visible even in my youth, for self-destruction. This book is my offering for recovery from that deadly affliction.

An additional item I would like to share with you was the discovery in my adolescent years of the Austrian School of Economics. It is the only school of economic thought that has remained true to its scientific roots, free of the corruptive influence of politics, and consistent with the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth, the Universal and Unifying Morality, and the biblical commandment, Thou shalt not steal.

It is the school of economic thought I champion in my first book The Desideratum, and in this one as well. Unfortunately, in today’s world, where Keynesian economics dominates, only a handful of people are aware of its existence or importance.

One of the great truths it taught me was that great masses of people are capable of holding to ideas that are profoundly false. Until that fatal tendency is defeated, until the great masses will readily yield to the Providential Laws of Reality and Truth in all matters of spiritual and social importance, long term world peace will remain an elusive goal.

In view of the financial and social calamity that is fast approaching a vast portion of the human landscape due to collapsing central bank paper currencies, fractional reserve banks, the world and especially US debt market, the derivative market, and other lunatic financial contrivances, I would encourage each supportive reader to email a complete copy of this book to every friend he or she believes might be interested in reading it.

Urge them to save it to their personal hard drives. No one should depend on a storage system they do not own. Such systems might be shut down in the coming chaos. Indeed, I would not be surprised to see dictatorial powers issuing draconian orders to prevent citizens from communicating with each other and to suppress books such as Revolt and The Desideratum.

Additionally, readers would do well to save this book to a solid state “thumb” drive as an added precaution. The small drives can be easily hidden if need be. They can also be easily copied and used as a secondary means of distribution.

In each case, please acknowledge Shakespir Self Publishing for making this book possible. The Shakespir contribution is priceless!

You must pardon me, dear reader, if I do not perform the role of author in accord with general expectations. My years are weighing upon me. I prefer now to live a quiet and undisturbed life with my loving and understanding wife. Please respect my desire for privacy.

I would like to conclude with this piece of advice to the young citizens of the United States. Never – never – never, join the US military! If you want to fight, if you want to perform your patriotic duty, then join in the call for a peaceful revolt, and help recapture our nation from those who are destroying it.

 

With Sincere and Deep Affection,

G. Lewis Bauman

 


Revolt!

Though this offering of a 28th amendment to the US Constitution may appear as arrogant, brazen, and too monstrous in size to be viable, a start has to be made somewhere. Our beloved country is racing toward economic, social, and military collapse. Citizens must rouse themselves from their stupor and seek answers to the following: The nation's political beliefs drift aimlessly this way and that, defined as they are by terms that are devoid of hard and fast meanings, such as conservative, liberal, left wing, and right wing etc. Is it possible for political understandings to be less ambiguous than the terms used to describe them? Where is political bedrock? Shouldn't our political believes, some of the most important we have, rest on a firm foundation? How much do we really understand about politics? The US government has run uninterrupted deficits for a mind-numbing procession of decades and has issued and continues to issue, mountains of debt certificates that everyone understands are hopelessly beyond repayment— yet not a word is spoken about bankruptcy. Are we a nation of fools to think we can remain prosperous as we sink deeper and deeper into a sea of unpayable debt? Where is reality? Where is sanity? The Federal Reserve steals the interest on our savings from us and we do nothing! Why are we so docile in the face of this obviously criminal institution? Where is our rage? If a gun wielding thief-in-the-night did the same, would we not be enraged? Whatever happened to the biblical commandment Thou shalt not steal? A huge body of convincing evidence demonstrates the 9/11/2001 buildings were brought down by controlled demolition, while the government maintains they were brought down by crashing airplanes and fires. Where are our investigative reporters? Where is integrity, commitment, and duty in the mass media industry. As difficult a task as it may be, US citizens must open their minds to their nation's sordid behavior and leadership as well as their own sorry understanding and lack of responsibility at the voting booths. Truly informed people search the internet for unfiltered news, and read books written by studious investigators who fearlessly and diligently pursue the truth. They attend seminars and support those who are building truth coalitions. When choice warrants, they do not hesitate to vote for third party candidates. Unrestrained currency printing and debt accumulation, criminal leadership, an irresponsible electorate, mindless wars, and aggressive policies foreign and domestic, cannot go on forever without ruinous consequences. Surely, in the not too distant future, the United States will find itself on its knees. War may explode in our home territory. A whole population of savers, investors, and retirees, will see their wealth disappear in the dust of collapsing fractional reserve banks and investment houses, and tens of millions in our beloved country will find themselves staring destitution and death in the face. Our military activities around the world will be severely disrupted. Disengagement from our numerous wars is bound to be messy. Indeed, thousands upon thousands of military personnel, and vast stores of munitions and military hardware, including nuclear warheads, may be suddenly stranded abroad, with no working means of either protecting them, or bringing them home. Great advances have been made in economic and political theory since the Constitution was set to paper. These advances are not reflected in its pages, and its brevity is such that it fails to provide citizens with the knowledge they need to defend it from crippling abuse by those in power. This book will provide remedies and pave the way toward a more promising future for all. It will provide common citizens with a means of wringing the criminality out of their government and placing it back on the path of reality, honesty, integrity, and sanity.

  • ISBN: 9781370885992
  • Author: G. Lewis Bauman
  • Published: 2017-09-02 22:20:37
  • Words: 80401
Revolt! Revolt!